Jump to content

Leaderboard


Popular Content

Showing content with the highest reputation since 09/08/1970 in Knowledge Base Articles

  1. 35 points
    In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe As of March 14, 2018, pricing for each mainland tier allotment has been reduced by 10%. Additionally, Premium subscribers now receive 1024m² of bonus land allotment, doubled from the previous 512m². Pricing and allotment comparison Previous tier structure New tier structure Total land allowance (m²) Pricing (USD) Total land allowance (m²) Pricing (USD) 512 Free with Premium account 1,024 Free with Premium account 1,024 $5.00 1,536 $4.00 1,536 $8.00 2,048 $7.00 2,560 $15.00 3,072 $13.00 4,608 $25.00 5,120 $22.00 8,704 $40.00 9,216 $35.00 16,896 $75.00 17,408 $67.00 33,280 $125.00 33,792 $112.00 Not available Not available 49,152 $150.00 66,048 $195.00 66,560 $175.00 Above the maximum shown on this table, tier allotment increases in quarter-Region increments at $44.00 each.
  2. 8 points
    What is abandoned land? How to abandon land How to tell if land is abandoned What happens to abandoned land I abandoned my land by mistake! How to request purchase of abandoned land Review of land that looks abandoned In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português What is abandoned land? Abandoned land is a mainland parcel that has been returned to Linden Lab by the previous owner. How to abandon land Open the World menu and select About Land. The About Land window opens. In the General tab of the About Land window, click Abandon Land. Review the confirmation and click Ok. How to tell if land is abandoned Abandoned land is owned by Governor Linden and contains the term "Abandoned Land" in the parcel name. The parcel description often includes the name of the previous owner. Land that is owned by another Resident is not abandoned, even if it appears to be unused. What happens to abandoned land When a mainland parcel is abandoned, the ownership of the parcel changes to Governor Linden. There is no Linden dollar (L$) grant related to abandoned land. Once abandoned, the parcel settings are amended to reflect the abandoned status and auto-return settings are enabled after one week. Note: This program applies only to Linden-owned Mainland areas and does not include Private Regions. I abandoned my land by mistake! You should never expect to be able to reclaim abandoned land. Please use care to make sure that any abandonment action is intentional. However, if you do make a mistake, please submit a support case as soon as possible. Include the parcel location and explain that you would like to reclaim a parcel you abandoned by mistake. We can attempt to make a one-time courtesy effort to recover the land for you. How to request purchase of abandoned land To request the sale of abandoned land, submit a support case of the type Land & Region, and choose Abandoned Land from the second dropdown. Provide the details of your request. In many cases, we can assist by making a larger or smaller sized parcel available rather than the actual parcel that has been requested. If you require a different size parcel than what is currently available, please request the desired size (in square meters) and provide a SLurl to the parcel's location. We will attempt to assist with a direct sale to the Resident who has made the request, so please submit a ticket as soon as you are aware of the abandoned location. We attempt to give priority to those who already have land in the region, so please let us know if the request is for neighboring or additional land within the same region. We will try to assist with a direct sale of the abandoned land at a the price of L$1 per square meter. In some cases, abandoned land may not be eligible for a direct sale. In these cases we will attempt to make the land available for sale via the auction system. Here are some of the reasons that requested land may need to be offered as an auction: The location has a limited amount of abandoned land in the region. The location is neighboring protected land or waterfront. The location is in a themed area such as Bay City, Horizons, or Nautilus. The location offers bonus object use. The location is Adult rated. The location is newly abandoned and not known to be available. These are only guidelines; each request is considered on a case-by-case basis and we may not be able to assist by making an abandoned parcel available as a direct sale or auction. Review of land that looks abandoned If you find a parcel that appears to be owned by a defunct account or group, there is a possibility that we can make the parcel available for sale. However, please note that land owned by a valid account or group is not abandoned, even if it appears to be unused. Please bear in mind that many Residents have annual accounts, and it may take many months for the account status to expire if they have chosen to leave or use a different account. Land cannot be reclaimed simply due to inactivity. If you have a premium account, you can trigger an auction for abandoned land by opening a support case with the following information: The parcel's SLurl. The concern that prompted you to investigate the parcel's status.
  3. 8 points
    Visiting a Place Page Managing your Place Pages Setting a landing point Hiding a Place Page Using a 360 snapshot as a Hero Image Determining who last edited a Place Page Bulk enabling and disabling Place Pages Want to tell the world about your Second Life land, parcel or region? Now you can with Place Pages, which are Linden-hosted web pages that make it easier than ever to promote and discover your presence in Second Life. Visiting a Place Page To visit a place page, simply click a Place Page URL in the page you’re viewing or paste it into your web browser's address bar. You may also search for a Place Page using the Google search engine by entering your search terms into the Google search bar on the Place Pages front page. While viewing a Place Page, you may learn more about the location, view images and videos, or ultimately visit the location in Second Life by clicking the Visit this location button located on the large image at the top of the page. Note: Upon visiting a place from a Place Page, you appear at either the parcel's landing point or the region's telehub, depending upon whether the Place Page depicts a parcel or a region. If no telehub is set for the region, you appear at the center of the region. Region owners and Estate Managers always appear at the center of their own regions. Place Page features Visit This Location - Click this button to visit the location depicted in the Place Page. Share It - Click to share this place page on Facebook or Twitter. Region Information - Lists information about the Region if this is a Region Place Page, including Name, Owner, Type, Size, and Maturity. Parcel Information - Lists information about the Parcel if this is a Parcel Place Page, including Name, Owner, Type, Size, Maturity, Category, and Region. Report Abuse - Click to file an abuse report against the Place Page. This may be appropriate if the Place Page: is not marked as Mature or Adult content when appropriate, is spam, or infringes your intellectual property rights. View Covenant (optional) - View the Region's covenant in a pop-up frame. This link is available on both Region and Parcel place pages. Upcoming Events (optional) - View and filter a calendar of upcoming events on this land. Click event names to get more details about each event. Items for Sale (optional) - View items currently for sale on the parcel. Click Go next to an item to teleport directly to the item inworld. FOR SALE (optional) - Appears if the land is currently for sale, and lists the sale price. Managing your Place Pages By default, every parcel and region in the Second Life world has a Place Page that is automatically derived from information in the parcel's existing profile. You may edit and embellish a Place Page for any parcel or region you own, or for group-owned parcels for which you have the Toggle 'Show Place in Search' and set category group ability. However, nobody can visit a Place Page unless the parcel's Show Place in Search checkbox is checked in the About Land window. Please note that this is toggled “off” by default, so you’ll need to enable it. To view and edit your place pages: Visit the place pages dashboard at: https://places.secondlife.com and log in using your Second Life credentials. In the upper right of the dashboard, move the mouse over your name and select My Places from the dropdown to view a full list of parcels and regions you own. Choose a region or parcel and click the Edit link next to that land's listing to begin editing the Place Page for that land. Under Details on the Place Page Edit page, fill out the following: Disable this place page - Disables the Place Page so nobody can view it. Show Covenant - Select this box to allow visitors to view the Region's Covenant on your Place Page. Show Items for Sale - Select this box to show items for sale on the parcel, and the inworld location of those items. Sale items may take up to 24 hours to appear on your Place Page. Each sale item must be set to Show in search on the General tab of the object editor window. Items set to Show in search that are not for sale still appear in the list, but are moved to the end of the list and have a cost listed as "Not Available". Show Calendar - Displays an event calendar and a list of upcoming events for the parcel. Visitors can filter events by specific date and click the event's name to learn more about the event. If there are no upcoming events, the calendar and event list are not shown. Title - The title for the Place Page. Typically, this is the name of your land. Tagline - A short, descriptive subtitle, displayed prominently on the "hero" banner at the top of the page. Description - A longer description or profile for the location, displayed below the images on the Place Page. Under the Optional section, you may provide a YouTube link in order to display a video on your Place Page. The Optional section also provides options for you to customize the color of your Place Page's background and font. Under the Hero Image section, choose an image to be the background of the banner at the top of your Place Page. Hero images must be 1980x700 resolution, or else they may be subject to distortion. Under Additional Images, you may choose up to three additional images to display on your Place Page. The images are shown as a slideshow and periodically cycle if not clicked by a user. Additional images must be of 852x486 resolution or they may be subject to distortion. The Region Information section provides statistical information about the land, and cannot be edited in the Place Page Editor. Setting a landing point A landing point is the spot where visitors appear when they teleport to a parcel of land, including teleports that are initiated by clicking the Visit this location button on a place page. Landing points can enhance your visitors' experience by directing them to an appropriate starting location on your land. Because landing points are a property of parcels and are not specific to Place Pages, they can only be set from within the Second Life Viewer and cannot be changed in Place Pages settings. For instructions on how to set the landing point on land that you own, see Managing your parcel - Setting a landing point. Note: When visiting a region's Place Page, visitors appear at the region's telehub. If no telehub is set, they appear at the center of the region. Region owners and Estate Managers always appear at the center of the region, regardless of whether a telehub is set. Hiding a Place Page Place Pages for land parcels are not visible to other Residents unless the land's Show Place in Search checkbox is checked in the About Land window. This box is unchecked by default. You may access the About Land window by visiting the parcel, then choosing World > About land from the top menu bar. If you wish to hide an entire region's Place Page (and Place Pages for all parcels on the region), you may check the Block Land Show in Search checkbox in the Region tab of the Region/Estate window. You may access the Region/Estate window by visiting the region and choosing World > Region/Estate from the top menu bar. Using a 360 snapshot as a Hero Image Note: The 360 snapshot feature is still in a very experimental Project Viewer stage, and is subject to drastic change or removal at any time as development continues. If you have captured a 360 snapshot using the 360 Snapshot Project Viewer, you may upload a captured 360 snapshot in place of your Hero Image: Capture a 360 snapshot to your computer as described in Taking inworld snapshots. Go to https://places.secondlife.com/spherical_zips in your web browser. You must be logged into the Second Life website in order to complete this step. Click the New button, then click Choose File and select the captured 360 snapshot (ending in ".zip") from your computer. Choose one of your places from the Place dropdown. Press the Update button to upload your 360 snapshot to the selected Place Page. An uploaded 360 snapshot replaces the Hero Image for the selected Place Page, allowing visitors to pan around the image for a full 360 degree view of the place where the image was captured. Determining who last edited the Place Page At the very bottom of the Place Page editor is a Last Updated by field that indicates when the page was last edited, and by whom. This can be of use to groups in which multiple officers may have the ability to edit Place Pages for the group's land. Bulk enable and disable Place Pages You can use the Bulk Enable/Disable tool to enable or disable more than one Place Page at a time. To use the Bulk Enable/Disable tool: Visit https://places.secondlife.com/ Click My Places to open a list of your Place Pages. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the link for Bulk Enable/Disable. On the Bulk Enable/Disable page, you can use the radio buttons in the Edit Status column to Enable or Disable each eligible Place Page. You may use the Enable All or Disable All button to automatically mark all pages accordingly. These changes are not finalized until you click the Update button at the bottom of the page. Click Update to enable and/or disable the marked Place Pages. You are then returned to My Places. Note: To help sort a large number of place paces, you can click the column headings in the Bulk Enable/Disable tool to sort by: Project Name & Description Current Status Edit Status Show in Search You may also use the Search field to look for a specific parcel or set of parcels.
  4. 7 points
    What is Tilia? Processing credit with Tilia Identity verification questions Why am I required to provide personal information to Tilia and what will you do with it? What types of IDs are acceptable? I have already submitted my photo ID. Why do I have to do it again? My bank, credit card company, or PayPal has already verified my identity. Why do I need to verify again with Tilia? I do not have a Social Security Number. How do I proceed? What if I do not want to submit Social Security information? Why wasn't this information asked for during registration? When will I be asked for an ID? Can I voluntarily submit my ID for verification before making a process credit request? How long does this process take? What happens to my US dollar balance if I don't comply? What is an acceptable proof of address? If I change my legal name, what kind of documents do I need to provide? How do I update my email on file so I can see the information request? What kinds of transactions do not normally require ID verification? Tilia usage questions Can I access my Tilia account separately from my Second Life account? Can Tilia credit U.S. dollars directly to my bank account? Do I need to use Tilia to buy Linden dollars? How can I avoid the inactivity fee? Why can't I process credit? What happens if I don't accept Tilia's Terms of Service? Technical and legal questions Is my information stored securely? Is Tilia compliant with GDPR? Does Tilia share my personal information with the government? Will my data be used for data mining purposes? Will my U.S. Dollar balance escheat to the state? What happens if a Second Life Resident dies with a U.S. Dollar balance still on their Tilia account? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Русский Türkçe What is Tilia? Tilia is a subsidiary of Linden Lab that offers certain financial services to the Second Life community and helps Second Life comply with U.S. laws and regulations. As of August 1, 2019, Tilia assumes management of your account's U.S. dollar balance in the form of your Tilia account. Tilia also handles process credit requests and payments made from your Tilia account. A Tilia account associated with your Second Life account is created automatically, and you do not need a separate username or password to access your Tilia account. Processing credit with Tilia In order to stay in compliance with regulatory requirements, if you wish to credit a portion of your U.S. Dollar balance to your PayPal or Skrill account (known as processing a credit) then you must provide certain personal information to verify your identity, including your: Name Address Date of birth Social security number (or government-issued identification if you are not a U.S. Citizen). You may also be required to provide additional information to complete the transaction. Tilia securely stores this information so that you should only need to provide it once. Note: Customers under 18 years of age will not be able to process credit after August 1, 2019 until they reach the age of 18. Important: If your Tilia Account is inactive for a period of 12 months, you will be charged an inactivity fee. Your Tilia Account will be charged this fee each successive month until it is no longer inactive. More information about this fee can be found in Section 3.4 of Tilia’s Terms of Service. Identity verification questions Why am I required to provide personal information to Tilia and what will you do with it? As registered money services businesses, Linden Lab and Tilia are required to comply with applicable U.S. laws and regulations. As part of our ongoing risk management process, we must obtain, verify, and record information about our customers for whom we offer financial-related services. We take your privacy and security seriously, so your personal information will continue to remain protected and will only be used for purposes that are outlined in Linden Lab’s and Tilia’s Privacy Policies. What types of IDs are acceptable? Acceptable forms of photo ID include: Driver's license Passport Any other form of government-issued photo ID If you do not have any of these forms of identification, please contact our customer support team for additional guidance. I have already submitted my photo ID. Why do I have to do it again? The financial-related services that are offered by Linden Lab are now managed by Linden Lab's wholly-owned subsidiary, Tilia Inc. Tilia is required to comply with applicable U.S. laws and regulations. As part of our ongoing risk management process, we obtain, verify, and record information about our customers for whom we offer financial-related services. Your personal information will remain protected and will only be used for purposes that are outlined in our Privacy Policy, which can be accessed on our website. Most Residents will not need to resubmit information if it has been previously provided. However, there may be some instances where Tilia may need to collect and verify the documentation again. My bank, credit card company, or PayPal has already verified my identity. Why do I need to verify again with Tilia? As a money services business, Tilia is required to comply with the various state and federal laws regarding money transmission, which require us to collect and verify this information regardless of whether you have provided this information to other financial institutions, such as your credit card company or PayPal. I do not have a Social Security Number. How do I proceed? If you are not a U.S. Citizen, you can provide a passport and a utility bill to verify your identity. If you are a U.S. Citizen and do not have a Social Security number, please contact customer service. What if I do not want to submit Social Security information? We will not be able to process your transaction without your Social Security information; the law states that we must collect and verify this information. Why wasn't this information asked for during registration? The requirements for collecting information only apply to certain financial transactions, such as using funds in your stored value wallet to process credit to US dollars. There are no such regulatory requirements for registering to use Second Life. When will I be asked for an ID? You are asked for ID when you initiate a process-credit request and send US dollars to your payment method on file. Can I voluntarily submit my ID for verification before making a process credit request? Yes. You can voluntarily submit your ID for verification without making a process credit request. This will ensure that you do not experience a delay when attempting to process credit for the first time with Tilia. Please visit your Billing Information page on the Second Life website. You can access the submission form by clicking We may need some additional information in order to process credit from your Tilia account. Once your identity has been verified, the message changes to read, "We have all the information we require to process credit from your Tilia account. Thank you!" For more information about this process, please see this blog post: Voluntary Regulatory Information Submission. How long does this process take? Requests are usually processed within one to three days, but in some cases the process may take up to 30 days. What happens to my US dollar balance if I don't comply? Your stored U.S. dollar balance remains on your account. We will not accept any process-credit requests until we have received and reviewed the requested documents. You may continue to use your U.S. Dollar balance to pay for Second Life services and Linden dollars. What is an acceptable proof of address? Acceptable documents are listed below, and must be dated within the last 3 months: Current utility bill Bank, credit card, or financial statement Cell phone bill Rental agreement or lease Tax form Voter registration Insurance statement Photos of these documents must be clear and in-focus, cover the full document, and must clearly show the required information. If I change my legal name, what kind of documents do I need to provide? If you change your name, you must submit updated information. Acceptable documents include: Name change certificate Marriage certificate Certificate of Divorce Certificate of commitment How do I update my email on file to make sure I can receive communications from Tilia? If you would like to update your email account to a more current one, you may do so by clicking this link: https://accounts.secondlife.com/change_email/. We encourage you to verify your email address and make sure it remains current. What kinds of transactions do not normally require ID verification? ID verification applies to process credit requests, which are requests to credit some or all of your U.S. Dollar balance to a PayPal or Skrill account. Therefore, the following types of transactions do not normally require you to send your personal information: Buying Linden dollars with any payment method Using a credit card, PayPal, or Skrill to pay for Second Life services such as Premium membership or land use fees Spending Linden dollars Selling Linden dollars on the LindeX Tilia usage questions Can I access my Tilia account separately from my Second Life account? This is currently not possible. Your Tilia account is integrated with your Second Life account, and is accessed through the Second Life website with your Second Life login credentials. Services that are provided by Tilia will be clearly marked. Can Tilia credit U.S. dollars directly to my bank account? Tilia cannot process credit directly to bank accounts at this time, but can credit your U.S. Dollar balance to a PayPal or Skrill account. Do I need to use Tilia to buy Linden dollars? No. Tilia is not involved in the Linden dollar purchase process. You can continue to use your payment method on file to buy Linden dollars and do not need to provide any additional personal information. How can I avoid the inactivity fee? If your Tilia account is inactive for a period of 12 months, you are charged a small, monthly inactivity fee of no more than $3.00 to offset the engineering, support, accounting, and compliance costs of maintaining your account. This inactivity fee cannot reduce your U.S. Dollar balance below zero, and will never result in a new credit card charge. The inactivity fee does not affect your Linden dollar balance. To avoid this inactivity fee, you need only to log into your account on the Second Life website at least once every 12 months. Additionally, Residents with a Premium membership will not incur an inactivity fee for as long as their Premium membership is current. Why can't I process credit? If we have not yet been able to verify your personal information documents, we will not be able to accept any process-credit requests. What happens if I don't accept Tilia's Terms of Service? If you maintain a U.S. Dollar balance (such as through the sale of Linden dollars on the LindeX), it is important that you review and accept the Tilia Terms of Service. You will be prompted to do so when you log into Secondlife.com. If you have a U.S. Dollar balance on August 1, 2019 and do not accept the Terms of Service, you will have until October 31, 2019 to do so or you will no longer be able to use your U.S. Dollar balance. If you do not accept the Terms of Service, you will still be able to log into Second Life and use your payment method on file (such as a credit card) to pay for items and services, but you will no longer have the ability to request a process credit transaction, or make payments for Second Life services from your U.S. Dollar balance. Technical and legal questions Is my information stored securely? We understand your concerns. Your information is protected as outlined in our Privacy Policy. If you do not feel comfortable providing the information through the internet, please contact customer support for additional methods. For more information about how we protect your data, check out our blog post: Information about Privacy and Security in Tilia. Is Tilia compliant with GDPR? Tilia is fully compliant with the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). For more information, please see our Privacy Policy. If you have specific questions about your individual account and situation, please contact our customer support team. Does Tilia share my personal information with the government? Tilia will not provide your information to any government unless compelled to do so through a legal process, such as a subpoena or search warrant. Will my data be used for data mining purposes? Tilia is not associated with data mining in any way, and your data will not be used for this purpose or sold to third parties. Tilia is a subsidiary of Linden Lab, and exists to strengthen our processes and better protect your data while allowing Second Life’s commercial backbone to thrive. Will my U.S. Dollar balance escheat to the state? Yes. Tilia will comply with unclaimed property laws in every state. What happens if a Second Life Resident dies with a U.S. Dollar balance still on their Tilia account? To see our current policy, visit our wiki article on this topic: Linden Lab Official:Death and other worries outside Second Life.
  5. 6 points
    Saving an outfit Re-using an item in multiple outfits The Outfit Gallery Upload a photo Select a photo from your inventory Take a snapshot Wearing a saved outfit Replacing your outfit Adding to your outfit You may save and load many different looks for your avatar by using outfits. An outfit can include everything that makes up your avatar, including but not limited to your shape, skin, hair, clothing, and attachments. You may access your current outfits by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. This opens the Appearance window, which allows you to browse, edit, and save outfits. Saving an outfit You can easily save your current outfit by using the Appearance window: Customize your avatar's appearance to your liking. For tips and helpful information about customizing your avatar, see Controlling your avatar's appearance. Once you've settled on a look, open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Press the Save As button to save what you are currently wearing as a new outfit. Choose an appropriate name for your outfit and press the Ok button. If you want to save changes to an existing outfit, you can click that outfit in the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window to select it, then press the triangle next to the Save As button to reveal and click the Save option. Re-using an item in multiple outfits The items in an outfit are actually links to the items in your inventory rather than distinct copies. In addition to reducing overall inventory clutter, this allows you to include no-copy clothing and attachments in many different outfits without having to purchase them more than once. The Outfit Gallery For each outfit, you can select a thumbnail image to help you remember what that outfit looks like. This can be incredibly helpful for Residents who like to maintain many different looks! You can access the Outfit Gallery by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer and clicking the Outfit Gallery tab. Every outfit in your inventory is shown in the Outfit Gallery; if you have not yet assigned a thumbnail image to an outfit, it is shown as a folder image with a clothing hanger on it. There are three ways to assign a thumbnail image to one of your outfits: Upload a photo You can upload an image from your computer to be used as the thumbnail for an outfit. The aspect ratio should be 1:1, such as a 256x256 pixel image. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to upload an image and select Upload Photo (L$10). Choose an image file to upload from your computer. The file is uploaded to Second Life and automatically set as the thumbnail for your selected outfit. You can also now access this image in the Textures folder of your Inventory window if you wish to use it again later. Select a photo from your inventory You can select a thumbnail image from your inventory in Second Life rather than uploading or creating a new image. This method is useful if you already have a good image of your outfit in your inventory and you'd like to avoid spending L$10 on uploading a new image or taking a snapshot. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to select an image and choose Select Photo. Choose a saved texture or snapshot from the Select Photo window, which automatically opens to the Textures folder of your Second Life inventory, then click OK. The image is set as the thumbnail image for your selected outfit. Take a snapshot You can use the Outfit Gallery to take a specialized snapshot at the correct size and 1:1 aspect ratio for use as an outfit thumbnail. Frame your avatar on the screen as you would like it to appear for the thumbnail image. Open the Appearance window to the Outfit Gallery tab by choosing Me > Appearance from the top menu bar. Right-click the outfit for which you'd like to take a snapshot, then choose Take a Snapshot. The Outfit Snapshot window opens, showing a preview of the snapshot image. If you are unhappy with the way the image looks, you can re-frame the snapshot and press the Refresh button to recapture the preview. Press the Upload (L$10) button to upload your snapshot and set it as the thumbnail for your selected outfit. For additional information and tips on using the snapshot tool in Second Life, see Taking inworld snapshots. Wearing a saved outfit You may either replace or add to your current outfit, depending upon both your current outfit and the outfit you'd like to wear. Replacing your outfit You may replace your current outfit, which means that all parts of your existing avatar are removed and replaced with the saved outfit. This is most useful when your outfit includes a complete set of body shapes, parts, and attachments that may not necessarily work with your current outfit, such as when changing from a human avatar to a creature avatar. To completely remove your current outfit and replace it with one you have saved: Open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. On the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window, right-click the name of the outfit you wish to wear and choose Wear - Replace Current Outfit to replace your current outfit. Adding to your outfit You may add to your current outfit, which means that the contents of the saved outfit are added to your avatar without removing your previous outfit. This is useful for adding specific clothing parts to your existing outfit, such as an overcoat that includes several avatar attachments. To add an outfit to your current appearance without removing your current outfit: Open the Appearance window by choosing Me > Appearance... from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. On the Outfit Gallery or My Outfits tab of the Appearance window, right-click the name of the outfit you wish to wear and choose Wear - Add to Current Outfit.
  6. 4 points
    Introduction Themes Traditional homes Houseboats Campers First-generation themes Features Getting your Linden Home Prerequisites Checking if you have enough land tier available Signing up New premium accounts Existing basic accounts Existing premium accounts Troubleshooting Finding your Linden Home Abandoning or changing your Linden Home Enjoying your Linden Home What you can do Covenant and restrictions Etiquette House controllers House control panels Content creation packs Textures Privacy Getting help Requesting terraforming of adjoining land Bellisseria Fairgrounds In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Introduction Linden Homes are ready-to-move-in homes in themed communities that are available only to premium account members. Premium account holders can get a free Linden Home, in addition to the other benefits of premium membership. For more information, see Premium membership. Themes Linden homes come in themed communities, each with choices of individual homes: Traditional homes Traditional suburban homes are arranged along tree-lined streets on 1024 sq m parcels. The homes are one and two-story buildings with shingle roofs, and in most models, a porch or patio area. A typical home has a two or more large rooms on the main floor and may have one or two upstairs. As described in a later section of this guide, you may use the House Controller on your parcel to choose among the styles pictured here, and you may use the house controller to change colors and details both inside and on the outside of the house. A traditional home is set back from the sidewalk and may have a hedge, a wall, or a low fence to set it apart from its neighbors. You may add to the planting or other landscaping elements on the parcel . Traditional homes are all within a convenient distance from communal park areas where you can join your friends for picnics, sports, or family activities. Some communal areas offer a dining or dance area, or a pool where you can relax. Houseboats With a houseboat home, you can enjoy life in coves and inlets around the perimeter of the continent or the large nearby island, or along rivers or around the large bay in the center of the continent. You cannot travel on a houseboat, but each houseboat parcel has room for you to moor your own sailboat or other watercraft. All water areas around the New Linden Homes continent are navigable and public. The houseboat models have large rooms with a high ceiling and skylighting, plus a deck area outside for you to relax or entertain on. Most houseboats are on 16 m x 64 m water parcels. Some are on square 32 m x 32 m parcels. Therefore, all have an area of 1024 sq m. All are accessible by open water. You may also walk easily from one place to another, along wooden docks that divide the parcels, or along sandbars and spits from the mainland. Houseboats are all within convenient reach of community areas and cultural venues (lighthouses, beaches, and community buildings where you may gather with friends). Campers Experience the country life while you sit back and relax in your own Linden Homes camping trailer. Spacious trailers -- 8 different models in all -- are all set on 512 sqm (16m X 32m) parcels in beautiful wooded regions. Depending on the model you choose, your home can be a sleek, aerodynamically designed trailer, or one that looks more like a Roma caravan, or one of several other designs. Take a look: To encourage you to get out and enjoy the area, camping trailer homes are in a rolling landscape with roaring streams and waterfalls nearby, and with plenty of hiking trails and places to sit around a campfire or have a picnic lunch. For large-scale socializing, visit the Campwich Lodge, which offers large areas for dancing or games, plus an expansive overlook of the nearby lake. Rez your pleasure boat or jetskis, or explore as a mermaid. Visit camping trailer regions by teleport or your own favorite ground or air transportation or, a brand new option with this Linden Homes theme, by rail. First-generation themes First-generation Linden Homes have limited space and land capacity. Homes in these themes are still available for purchase, but provide less land capacity and use older-style control panels: Tahoe - Rustic cabin retreats with winding roads among hills and pine forests. Elderglen - Fantasy dwellings with winding roads around hills and giant trees. Sahreta Osumai - Traditional Japanese homes nestled in picturesque areas with mossy rocks and colorful trees. Meadowbrook - California modern suburban homes with decks perfect for barbeques! First-generation Linden Homes have a land capacity of 175 on a 512 m2 parcel. Features Linden Homes contain one or more of the following features, depending on the type of home: Touch entry - Left-click the front door to enter and exit your home. Touch lighting - Click the lights to toggle them on and off. Working fireplace - Click the fireplace to toggle a fire on and off. You'll also get a control panel that enables you to manage your home accessories and to change the textures used in your home. For more information, see Using the control panel. Getting your Linden Home You can get a Linden Home when you sign up for a premium account, upgrade your basic account to premium, or if you already have a premium account and have not claimed your Linden Home yet. Prerequisites If you have a premium account and you have 512m2 available tier then you qualify for a Linden Home. For example, if you have a new premium account — you've just joined Second Life as a premium account or upgraded from a basic account — and haven't changed your land usage, then you have exactly 1024m2 of available tier. Note: You don't have to use your premium account 1024m2 land tier for a Linden Home. You can use it instead towards other mainland purchases or you can contribute it to group tier allocations. Also, if you abandon your Linden Home, you can use your 1024m2 tier to buy other mainland parcels. Checking if you have enough land tier available If you don't have any land already in Second Life, then you will always have enough land tier, because each premium account comes with 1024m2 of land tier. There are two ways to check if you have enough available tier: Inworld: From the Viewer menus, choose World > My land holdings.... Your available land tier is listed in Available for land purchases. Website: If you already own land, then you can also check if you have enough land tier on the Second Life website: Go to Your Account. On the left side of the page, click Account Summary. Find the section called Land Holdings Available square meters for purchase at your current tier is listed under Available for purchase. Signing up The Linden Home registration process offers options for theme, home type, and home name. Once you submit your registration, your selected home is immediately generated on the next available parcel within your selected theme. You cannot request a specific region or parcel location. New premium accounts Go to join.secondlife.com. Complete your registration. Upgrade to premium as prompted. Go to Linden Home registration and log in with your Second Life account and password. Existing basic accounts Go to Premium Membership registration and log in with your Second Life account. Follow the account upgrade process. Once your account is upgraded to Premium Membership, the page will redirect to Linden Home registration. Existing premium accounts Go to Linden Home registration and log in with your Second Life account and password. View the four themed communities and home options within each theme. Click on your preferred home image. Name your home. Click Next. Read the Terms and Conditions and check the box agreeing to them. Click Accept. Review your Linden Home information on the confirmation page. Click Go to your Home or use the SLurl provided. Note: Confirmation is sent to the email address you provided to register your Second Life account. Troubleshooting If you didn't receive your email confirmation, be sure to check your email application's spam folder. It's also possible there has been an error in the email process, and your Linden Home is ready and waiting for you. If your Linden Home is ready, a landmark is sent to you inworld. If there appears to be such a problem, head to the Support Portal and submit a ticket. Identify whether the email did not go through and your home is actually available, or whether there was a problem with the registration process overall. Finding your Linden Home Your welcome email will provide the location of your Linden Home. If you lost or did not receive your welcome email, then there are two ways to locate your Linden Home: On the Second Life website: Log in using your Second Life username and password. Go to your Account Dashboard. On the left, click Land Manager. Click My Mainland. Look for the name of the Linden Home that you chose when you registered. Click the link in theLocation column to teleport there. Inworld: Login to Second Life with the Second Life Viewer Choose World > My land holdings... Select the parcel that matches your chosen Linden Home name. Click Teleport. You will be teleported to your Linden Home. Abandoning or changing your Linden Home To change your choice of Linden Home type, you must abandon your current Linden Home and then register for a new one. To abandon your Linden Home: Choose World > About Land and click the General tab. Click Abandon Land. After you confirm your choice, the land is removed from your account. Now if you wish, you can register for another Linden Home. Warning: Please use this reasonably: if you abandon and choose a new Linden Home five times in 24 hours, you are temporarily blocked from choosing another. You will need to wait 24 hours before registering again. Enjoying your Linden Home What you can do You can: Decorate your home with furniture or other items from Second Life Marketplace. Your partner or friends can help you decorate as well. Linden Home parcels work just like any other parcel of land in that regard; who can rez objects on your land depends on the About Land settings. See Managing land for more information. Customize textures used in your Linden Home via the control panel. See Using the control panel. Covenant and restrictions The covenant describes how you can use Linden Home land. To view the covenant, choose World > Region / Estate, then click the Covenant tab or right-click on the ground and choose About Land then click on the COVENANT tab. You are not allowed to: Terraform Linden Home land, sell it, deed it to a group, join it with another parcel, or divide the land. Modify the structure. For example, you can not move or eliminate individual components of your Linden Home such as the fireplace or a window. Move or rotate the structure. Your Linden Home must remain as it came on its 512m2 parcel. If you want both a Linden Home and more land for your premium account, you can use your remaining tier and/or upgrade on the Land Use Fees page. Tip: Linden Home land can't be group-owned. But if your personal Resident account is eligible for Linden Home land, you can set the land to a group to collaborate with other group members. Also, you agree that your Linden Home: Is for residential use only. Business use of any kind is prohibited, including parcel rental, rental boxes, classified ads or other forms of advertising, and event listings. Will be kept presentable and in-theme. Does not include traffic tracking. Land cannot contain temporary object rezzers or individual prims beyond the maximum size allowed by the Second Life Viewer build tools. Skyboxes are allowed on the Belliseria continent above 2000 meters. Skyboxes are not allowed for first-generation Linden Homes. Etiquette Living in a community includes courtesy towards your neighbors. Here are some guidelines for etiquette in Linden Home regions: Use local chat say, rather than shout. Adhere to the maturity rating for the Linden Home region you are in. Respect your neighbors' privacy. Review general Second Life etiquette suggestions and incorporate them into your Linden Home experience. House controllers Each Linden Homes parcel is equipped with a House Controller like the one shown here. It is just outside the parcel boundary, often near a street or sidewalk or on the dock next to a houseboat parcel. Yours may look like a mailbox or some other marker appropriate to the neighborhood. A House Controller is your tool for selecting the specific model of home you want to erect on the parcel. To use it, simply left-click on it. The House Controller will only respond if you are the current owner of the parcel. It will not respond to guests, friends, or strangers. Choose a home from one of the available models by clicking one of the numbered buttons. Your new home will appear near the center of the parcel, replacing whichever home was there before. You cannot rotate the home or move it to another spot on the parcel. Linden Homes are always rezzed with the front door facing the House Controller. You may replace the model on your parcel at any time. Homes within a theme all fit in the same parcel area, so they will not interfere with vegetation, fencing, or other objects that Linden Lab has placed on land next to your parcel. However, because each model has a different floor plan, you will usually need to move furniture or other items that you have placed in a previous home so that it is arranged well in your new home. If you select the notecard option, you will receive an instructional notecard. It will explain the features of your house in greater detail than they are covered in this guide. If you select the Content Creation Pack option, you will receive a folder of items that you may use to landscape your parcel and decorate your home. House control panels As you enter a Linden Home, you will find a Control Panel just inside the front door. The control panel is your tool for customizing the appearance of your home and for controlling access. The layout of menu buttons for a Control Panel varies slightly from one theme to another, but all Linden Homes have the same basic set of functions described here. Click on the Control Panel to see the main menu of your options: When you make most changes with the Control Panel, you receive confirmation in chat. A notice appears within a few seconds to tell you that the new information has been recorded in the system. The Door button offers you a choice between allowing your doors to Stay Open when you click on them, or to AutoClose within ten seconds after they are opened. The Windows button on the main menu toggles the window covering (blinds) up or down. Using this button in the Control Panel toggles all windows in the house at once, so that they are all either up or down at the same time. If you (or a person you have granted access to) want to raise or lower a single window covering, you can do that by simply left-clicking on the window covering (Note: Some house models also offer the option to open and close individual windows. Where that option is available, it is not managed in the Control Panel. To open a window, you just left-click on it). The Access button, which is only visible to you as the parcel owner, will let you give additional people permission to use the Control Panel menus. Using its Add Name menu option, you create a whitelist and add anyone you choose. The person does not need to belong to a special group. You may remove the person’s access permission at any time by clicking this same Access button and using the Remove Name option. If you have created a whitelist, you may check to see who is on it by using the View List option. The Access menus allow you to control who has permission to use some features in your home. There are three access levels: ONLY ME is the highest level. If you click that menu button, nobody else may use the Control Panel, operate the window blinds, or open doors. LIST is the middle level. If you have created a whitelist, selecting LIST gives people on the list permission to operate window and door functions, and most functions in the Control Panel (but not the Access functions). ANYONE is the lowest level. If you click that button, anybody may open doors or operate the blinds. Only you and people on the whitelist may use the Control Panel. Please note that the Access menu does not control permission to rez objects in your home, or change its music stream. Manage those permissions by creating a group for your home, as discussed later in this guide. The Redecorate button offers options which are different in each home theme, although some features are found in all themes. The Outside button offers different color schemes for painting the siding on the home. The Wall button lets you change the color of the walls inside your home. The Floor button lets you choose among options for flooring inside the home, so you may opt for carpeting or different types of wood flooring. Submenu buttons on some themed homes include options for changing the color of the Roof, Trim, Deck, or other parts of the home that are special for that theme. Most menus in your Control Panel also contain two other buttons. The Done button closes the Control Panel menus and saves your most recent changes in the system’s memory. The Back button opens the previous dialog menu. Content creation packs As a homeowner, you may want to personalize your parcel by adding vegetation, pathways, rocks, or other decorative items. Please remember to stay within the theme of your neighborhood. For more specific details, refer to the covenant in World > About Land when you are standing in your parcel. As an aid, your Linden Home comes with a free Content Creation Pack. In it, you will find items that you may use to spruce up your home/parcel -- items such as decor items, textures, wall/fence kits and lighting may be included. Unlike the house itself, which does not add to the Land Impact on your parcel, these extra objects and anything else that you rez will add land impact, so be careful to stay within your limit. Refer to World > About Land > Objects to verify your available land impact. You may receive the Content Creation Pack by clicking on the appropriate menu option in your House Controller. Textures Texture packs with the building textures for each first-generation Linden Home theme are available at the Linden Home infohubs. Resale of textures is prohibited. Texture pack locations: Meadowbrook Infohub Tahoe Infohub Elderglen Infohub Shareta Osumai Infohub Privacy Total privacy in an open community like Linden Homes is not possible, but there are ways that you can manage access to your home and its features. As noted above, for example, you can use your home’s Control Panel to control who may enter your home and use its redecorate functions. You may also use the Options tab in World > About Land to determine who is allowed to rez objects on your parcel and whether people outside the parcel can see and hear what you are doing. You may not use selections in the Access tab of About Land to set ban lines around your parcel, but you may use the Linden Homes Security System (found in the Content Creation Pack) to eject unwanted visitors from your parcel. You may not use other security systems that have a shorter warning time or a greater detection range than the Linden Homes Security System. The security system is designed to be wall-mounted. When activated, it scans your parcel as much as 400m above and below the control unit, provides a warning to unauthorized visitors, and then ejects them from the parcel. It does not detect people in neighboring parcels. You may adjust the system’s range and the amount of warning time (minimum 15 seconds), and may tell the system to ignore members of your group or specific people that you have added to its whitelist. The system will not function if it is placed at an altitude between 100m and 2000m above sea level, but can be used in your Linden Home or in a skybox above 2000m. Instructions for setting up the system and operating it are provided on a notecard with the unit, and in shortened form, by clicking on the system’s help (?) button. Getting help As a premium account holder, you're eligible for live chat and ticket support from the Support Portal. If you need support for your Linden Home: Go to the Support Portal and choose Submit a Support Case. Select Land and Region from the first dropdown menu. Select Linden Home Issues from the second dropdown menu. Fill out the required fields; make sure to include as much relevant information as possible when describing your issue. Click Submit to submit your ticket. Requesting terraforming of adjoining land If there is an issue with the terraforming of your parcel or nearby land that you suspect is an error: Go to the Support Portal. Click Contact Support. Click Submit a Support Case form. From the dropdown menus, choose: Land and Region Linden Home Issues - Terrain or Content Fill in the rest of the required fields. Click Submit to submit your ticket. Bellisseria Fairgrounds The Bellisseria Fairgrounds is open to all Premium Residents of Second Life to use for their events. Private events that require the Fairgrounds to be restricted to a certain list or group of people are not a good use for the space; however, if you are happy to welcome anyone to your events then the Bellisseria Fairgrounds is a great place to choose to plan your next party, get together, shindig or whatever! Any Premium member can reserve the Bellisseria Fairgrounds for their event, though preference will be given to members of Bellisseria Resident groups. While any public event is welcome at the Fairgrounds, we encourage the planning of events that contribute to and support the Bellisseria community spirit. Use this form to reserve the Bellisseria Fairground to host an event: http://bit.ly/BellisseriaFairgroundsCalendar
  7. 4 points
    Introduction to avatars in Second Life Using the Avatar Picker to choose a pre-made avatar Customizing a classic style avatar Understanding and customizing rigged mesh-style avatars Getting a rigged mesh avatar from the Second Life Marketplace In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Русский Türkçe 日本語 Introduction to avatars in Second Life Your avatar is your representative in the world of Second Life. By controlling your avatar, you can explore, interact with the Second Life world, and communicate with other avatars controlled by Second Life users. Because avatars represent you, they are an important form of self-expression and the first thing many new users want to do after arriving in Second Life is customize their avatar's appearance. There are many, many options for customizing your look, and there is a huge market for user-designed body shapes, clothing, makeup, hairstyles, accessories, and even complete avatars. This article will help you take your first steps toward finding a style that you and your avatar can be proud of. Using the Avatar Picker to choose a pre-made avatar If you are not yet comfortable with Second Life's editing tools or don't have the time to shop for a custom avatar, the Avatar Picker provides a very easy interface for choosing a high quality, professionally designed avatar model. These avatars are provided by Second Life maker Linden Lab free of charge, and you can try as many as you want, whenever you want! To use one of these pre-made avatars, follow these steps: Select Me > Choose an avatar from the top menu bar in the Second Life window. In the Choose an Avatar window that opens, click a category tab to see a preview of avatars in that category. The available categories may change over time as new avatars are added or removed. Click the image of your desired avatar to immediately wear that avatar. Custom animation overriders and pre-made avatars Some avatars in the Avatar Picker use a scripted attachment called an animation overrider (AO for short) to replace Second Life's default avatar animations for moving, sitting, and standing idle. Under most circumstances, you won't need to interact with this attachment; it's a small invisible cube attached to your avatar's chest attachment point, and it overrides your avatar's animations automatically. When you start to customize your avatar with new clothing and attachments, you may find that a new attachment has replaced the AO on your avatar's chest attachment point, in which case your avatar will revert to using Second Life's default animations. You may also acquire a third-party AO from one of Second Life's many merchants, either individually or as part of a larger package. If multiple animation overriders are attached to your avatar, their scripts and animations can conflict and cause your avatar to move in undesirable ways. If you prefer to use a third-party AO or Second Life's default animations, you can remove a pre-made avatar's AO by doing the following: Click the Appearance button in the Second Life Viewer. Click the Wearing tab in the Appearance window that appears. Find the AO attachment in the list, which will be named differently depending upon which avatar you have chosen. It may be called: Animation Overrider - Female, Animation Overrider - Male, or Animation Overrider - Zombie. Right-click the name of the animation overrider and choose Detach to remove the AO. Customizing a classic style avatar It is important to know that customizing a "classic" avatar in Second Life works a bit differently than customizing other types of avatars. A classic avatar is a humanoid avatar that has been created and customized using a combination of the built-in body part sliders, texture-based clothing, and avatar attachments. Classic avatars give you a lot of control over the details of your avatar's appearance, but are not designed to take advantage of recent developments in computer graphics technology, such as rigged mesh or normal and specular mapping. For detailed information on how to edit the many parts and features of a classic avatar, see the article Customizing a classic style avatar. Understanding and customizing rigged mesh-style avatars In addition to the "classic" avatars, you have the option of selecting one of the many newer rigged mesh-style avatars. These consist of a custom 3D mesh character model that is worn as an attachment and overlaid on top of the skeleton of a classic avatar. The classic avatar itself is typically hidden by an alpha mask, but the uploaded 3D model still makes use of the classic avatar's joints and animations. This type of avatar allows 3D content creators to design models in a third-party tool such as Maya or Blender, allowing them to take advantage of the latest graphics updates to Second Life and create highly detailed human and non-humanoid avatar forms. However, due to their nature as an overlay on top of a hidden classic avatar, mesh avatars may not wear the texture-based clothing made for classic avatars. Mesh avatars may also have difficulty interacting with attachments, accessories or animations that were originally intended for classic avatars; for help finding appropriate clothing, see Buying clothing that fits your avatar. Getting a rigged mesh avatar from the Second Life Marketplace Because mesh avatars are designed by a variety of content creators, the process of obtaining and wearing a mesh avatar may vary greatly by merchant; the following is a generic scenario: Visit the Second Life Marketplace and purchase a mesh avatar. Make sure that the listing claims "Mesh: 100% Mesh" on the right side of the screen underneath Permissions. If your purchase came in a box, open and unpack the box as described in Opening boxes. If your purchase was not boxed, skip this step. Find the new folder in your inventory containing your purchase and read the included notecards. Most merchants include instructions on how to properly wear, customize, and operate their avatars. If no instructions are included, right-click the folder and choose Replace Current Outfit. This removes all attachments your avatar is wearing and replaces all parts of your avatar with the entire contents of the folder. Be aware that many mesh avatars come with interchangeable parts that should not be worn at the same time, so you may need to remove the duplicate attachments manually if you Replace Current Outfit. Tip: If at any time you feel you are unhappy with the outcome of your avatar modifications, you can start over with a fresh default avatar by choosing from the Avatar Picker.
  8. 4 points
    Overview Why buy land? Types of land How to buy land Buying mainland Buying Private Regions Additional tips Land tier Example Land use fees Exceptions Finding land to buy Land sales in Private Regions Land object capacity Overview More than one parcel in a region Vehicles and parcel limits Object bonus factor In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Overview Why buy land? Owning land can be one of the most exciting and rewarding experiences in Second Life. Once you become a landowner, you truly become a part of the Second Life community, and can create and keep things inworld that will be there when you return. Your own land is a space you can customize however you want, and a canvas where your creations can come to life. Land in Second Life is a place to call home, where you can invite friends to hang out, hold events, and more. You can use many of the virtual items you purchase in Second Life—like clothes, accessories and cars—anywhere. But if you purchase a house, a garden, or an entire forest, you're going to need somewhere to put it: your own plot of land! Types of land How to buy land There are several ways to buy land: Buy a parcel on the mainland if you have a premium account. You get a free Linden Home with a premium account, which is a great way to get started with land ownership. See Linden Homes for more information. Buy an entire region (a private island). Instead of buying land, you can rent land: On a private estate - see Renting land from other Residents. On the mainland - see Renting a region for a special event. Buying mainland Linden Lab does not usually set land for direct sale on the mainland. However, there are two special cases in which you can obtain mainland parcels from Linden Lab: Auctions: Linden Lab regularly auctions mainland parcels via Second Life Land Auctions. Land owned on the mainland is subject to a land use fee (also known as a tier fee), which is a monthly charge in addition to premium membership. Abandoned land: In some special cases, Linden Lab sells abandoned mainland parcels to individual Residents. For more information, see Abandoned land. Remember that you can buy land from your fellow Residents, and if you want a whole region to yourself, you can buy a Private Region from the Land Store. Land owned by Governor Linden named "Protected Land" will not generally be terraformed or sold to Residents. Requirements To purchase mainland land in Second Life, you must have a premium account with current payment information on file, and your account must be in good standing. You may also be required to have a clean disciplinary record. As a premium account holder, you have 1024 square meters of tier, that is the ability to own 1024 square meters initially. For more information, see Land tier. A premium account also provides many other benefits. For more information, see Premium membership. Buying Private Regions A private region is a 256m x 256m piece of virtual land. Regions run on a single server and have their own set of controls beyond those provided to mainland parcel owners. For more information see: Buying Private Regions Private Regions Managing private regions Requirements By purchasing a Private Region, you are agreeing to pay the initial setup fee, plus monthly service fees for as long as you own the region. You are also agreeing to a restocking fee if you cancel your order. You will be charged the setup fee once the order is completed. Monthly fees begin 30 days from the date you complete your purchase. Procedure Once you find the land you want, buying it is easy: Right-click the parcel you want to purchase. Choose About Land. Click the Buy Land button. Review the purchase information. Click OK. Additional tips The following tips will help you purchase land wisely and confidently: Make sure you know exactly what you're purchasing! Press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-P on your keyboard to toggle parcel boundary lines. Right-click the parcel to bring up the About Land window, which shows you the land's Area in square meters. Look at the About Land window's General tab to see if objects are included in the sale. Check the Parcel land capacity entry in the About Land window's Objects tab. This indicates how much land impact the land can support before it stops allowing new objects to enter.. Important: If you don't own the land yet, the Region capacity entry is not a measure of the object usage you will receive! If the Advanced menu is active, try hiding objects by pressing Ctrl-Alt-Shift-1 on your keyboard to make sure there isn't a hidden "hole" in the property that you are unwittingly purchasing with the rest of the land. Make sure you're happy with the overall shape of the land. Most land in Second Life can only be raised 4m above or below its original position, and the previous owner may have already reached that limit. Land tier Land tier (often simply referred to as "tier) is a key concept of Second Life land ownership. "Tier" refers to the maximum amount of land you can own on the mainland, measured in square meters (m2). A premium account includes 1024m2 of tier, which can be used for a free Linden Home. Thus, the minimum tier that anyone can have is 1024m2. Note: Tier is not the land itself. It represents the maximum amount of land you can own before advancing to the next pricing tier. "Available tier" or "free tier" (free meaning "remaining" not "free of charge") refer to the remaining, potential land you can own, not counting land you already own. For example, "My tier is 1024m2. I own a 256m2 parcel, so I have 768m2 of free tier. If I buy a 384m2 parcel, that leaves me with 384m2 of tier that's available." Example For example, if you have "5,120m2 of available tier" — the premium account's included 1024m2 + 4,096m2 additional tier level — then you can own any combination of land parcels up to a total of 5,120m2. So owning a 1,024m2 parcel + a 2,048m2 parcel + another 2,048m2 parcel = 5,120m2 completely fills your tier. Land use fees If you need more land, you must upgrade. Use the Land Use Fees page to update your tier level. Upgrading to a higher tier increases your land use fees, but you get a bigger "box for blocks." Increasing your tier level is sometimes called "tiering up." You are notified when purchasing a land parcel if buying it will increase your tier. Tier is connected to but not the same as land use fees. You pay land use fees for tier. Tier is not a currency like Linden dollars. This is especially important for new landowners to understand, as some experienced Residents use the term inaccurately. It's accurate to say "I pay for tier," or "I pay tier fees," but not "I pay tier." Log into your Second Life account summary to manage your land use fees and land. Land use tiers and pricing are shown in the Land Use Fees page. Any tier beyond the first full region is assigned in half-region increments at a rate of US$97.50 per half region. A higher level appears in your land use fees when you upgrade beyond a full region on the mainland. If you sell the land and move back to a tier of one full region or below, the system automatically tiers you down. Note: Private Region (island) fees are charged independently, and do not affect your land tier level. Exceptions Note the following exceptions to the general rules stated above: You can own a private estate yet not have a mainland tier. Group-owned land gets a 10% bonus tier. See Group-owned land for more information. Some Resident-owned private estates have their own distinct tier systems which are not part of Linden Lab's land use fees. If you are renting from such an estate, contact the owner or another appropriate Resident directly for assistance. Finding land to buy The inworld Search tool enables you to browse and filter a comprehensive database of real estate listings. Simply follow these steps: In the Viewer, choose World > Search. Choose Land & Rentals from the dropdown menu at the top of the Second Life Search window. You can search by keyword or leave the Search field blank. Click Search. A list of classified real estate ads appears. In the lefthand column, select For Sale. If you wish, filter your results by customizing the Area and Price fields and by indicating what kind of land you wish to buy in the Type dropdown menu. The filters update the listings automatically. Click on a listing to view more details. When you find a property that interests you, click Teleport to go explore it! Tip: Looking for land on the mainland near you? Select World > World Map to open the map, then select the Land for Sale checkbox. Nearby land for sale is highlighted on the map. Second Life's Auctions also list land parcels up for sale to the highest bidder. Auction parcels can sell for Linden Dollars (L$) as well as US dollars (USD$). Land sales in Private Regions The mechanics of buying and selling land in a Private Region are very similar to the process on the mainland. However, there are a few key differences that buyers and sellers should take into account when making a land transaction in a Private Region. Similarities As the seller, the Private Region owner can split parcels of the region and set them for sale. The technical steps for buying the land are identical. Differences Parcels in Private Regions are governed by covenants. A covenant is a kind of contract, defined by the owner of the Private Region, to which you must agree before buying the land. It may outline details such as local theme, rental fees, architectural regulations, and rules of behavior. Land purchased in a Private Region does not count against your land use tier, however the owner may charge you a fee for continuing use of the land. The Private Region owner may evict you from your parcel in a Private Region at any time. Private Region owners have absolute power over their estates and are within their rights to reclaim land as they see fit. Make sure to read your region's covenant closely for terms of use before you buy your parcel. Private Region owners have use of the Region/Estate window which includes such region access options as: Access restricted to Residents based on payment status Region maturity can be set to General, Moderate, or Adult Tip: If a region owner changes the maturity setting for their region, it may affect who can access your parcel and view search listings made from it. Read the region covenant and communicate with the region owner (or estate manager where applicable) to avoid any disruptions to your parcel settings or access. Land object capacity The number of objects (prims) that can exist on a region is restricted due to technology limitations. The corresponding calculation for mesh objects are different. See Calculating land impact for more information. Overview Each region of 256m x 256m (65536 square meters) supports a land capacity of 15,000. Divided evenly, this means that each region has a capacity of approximately 0.229 per square meter. In practical terms, this means a 512 square meter parcel can support up to a capacity of 117, a 1024 square meter parcel can support up to 234, and so forth. More than one parcel in a region All parcels belonging to the same owner (or group) in the same region share their land capacity. You can view this represented as Region capacity in the About Land window. In this way, it is possible for the Parcel land impact number to be higher than the Parcel land capacity number. To view the About Land window, stand on a parcel and select World > About Land. For information about objects on the land, select the Objects tab in the About Land window. Vehicles and parcel limits Objects that are Selected / sat upon do not count against the Parcel land capacity. This allows vehicles to pass freely through parcels that might not otherwise be able to support them. Remember that a Region can only support 15,000 objects, regardless of parcel settings- if a Region is full, you cannot drive a vehicle into it. Object bonus factor In Private Regions, the owner may set a Object Bonus to increase the land capacity of each parcel. This setting multiplies the capacity each parcel can support by the Bonus Factor. It is important to note that this does not increase the maximum capacity supported by the Region, which means that not all parcels in the Region will be able to reach their listed maximum capacity.
  9. 3 points
    What is a baked texture and why would I want it on mesh? Major Features Benefits How it Works Wearable and Bake Channels Universal Wearables Setting a mesh to use baked textures Working with the new channels Working with Animesh Script Support Step-By-Step Example Test Content Known Issues In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Bakes on Mesh is a feature to allow system avatar baked textures to be shown on mesh attachments. What is a baked texture and why would I want it on mesh? If you use a standard system avatar, you can wear several texture layers to customize your skin and add tattoos and clothing layers. To save processing time and provide everyone on any system the same view of your appearance, those textures are "baked" by a server into a single combined texture. Previously if you wanted to use a custom mesh body part and do the same kind of customization, the body part would need its own texturing system. In addition, you would usually need to apply an "alpha" wearable to the underlying standard avatar body part to hide it so that it doesn't interfere with your mesh part. With bakes on mesh, you can apply any system skins and other layers to your avatar (you don't need or want the alpha layer), and then tell the viewer to apply the resulting baked texture to your mesh body part. The underlying system avatar part is hidden for you automatically so the alpha wearable is not required. Major Features Any face of a mesh object can be textured using any of the server baked textures. The corresponding region of the system avatar is hidden if any attached mesh is using a baked texture. New texture bake channels have been introduced to give more control over how meshes get textured. A new “universal wearable” is now provided with support for the new texture channels. Benefits Avoid the need for appliers, leading to an easier customization workflow. Avoid the need for onion avatars, leading to fewer meshes and fewer textures at display time. Avoid the need to sell full-perm meshes. The user can customize any mesh that’s set to use Bakes on Mesh by simply equipping the appropriate wearables, without needing to modify the mesh itself. How it Works Wearable and Bake Channels Avatar wearables have traditionally been baked into six different textures (BAKE_HEAD, BAKE_UPPER, BAKE_LOWER, BAKE_EYES, BAKE_SKIRT, BAKE_HAIR) by the baking service. These textures are derived by compositing the corresponding textures in the various wearable items on your avatar. For example, a shirt sets the UPPER texture, and multiple shirts layered together would contribute to the resulting BAKE_UPPER texture. The Bakes on Mesh project added five new bake channels as well: LEFT_ARM_BAKED, LEFT_LEG_BAKED, AUX1_BAKED, AUX2_BAKED, AUX3_BAKED. Unlike the original textures, the system avatar does not use any of these textures. They are purely extensions to allow more control over mesh appearance. LEFT_ARM_BAKED and LEFT_LEG_BAKED are intended to help with making mesh avatars where the left and right limbs have different textures. The AUX channels are general purpose, and could be used for body regions not possessed by system avatars (such as wings) or for other purposes. Altogether this gives 11 possible channels for wearables to use for textures, and for the baking service to produce. Universal Wearables New channels aren’t useful unless there is some way to wear items that use those channels To meet this need, a new wearable type called Universal has been added. The Universal wearable has slots corresponding to all 11 of the new and old bake channels. In layering order, universal wearables go above the skin and tattoo wearables, and below all other types of clothing. Setting a mesh to use baked textures You can now apply these textures to the diffuse textures of your avatar’s attachments: Right click on the attachment, and click edit and from the edit face menu select textures. Click the diffuse texture icon to open up the texture picker. The texture picker has an extra radio button mode called 'bake' for selecting server bakes. The 'bake' radio button mode has a dropdown for selecting server bake textures. When an attachment is using a baked texture, the corresponding base mesh region of the system avatar is hidden. If a mesh face is set to show a baked texture but is not attached to an avatar, you will see a default baked texture. If you are using an older viewer without Bakes on Mesh support, then faces set to show baked textures will also display as the default baked texture, and base mesh regions will not be hidden. The “fallback” textures for the original bake channels. Viewers that don’t support Bakes on Mesh will show these images in place of the baked textures. You will also see these on any non-attachment objects that are set to use Bakes on Mesh. The new bake channels have similar fallback textures. Working with the new channels The new bake channels are handled a bit differently from the original six. With the original channels like upper body, there are several types of wearables that can affect the contents, and there is always a base layer of skin at the bottom of the texture stack. This means that unless you are using an alpha wearable, your bakes will always be opaque. For the new channels, the only textures are those supplied by any universal wearables you have on, so the resulting bakes can potentially be transparent. Note that this is currently the only way to make the new channels transparent, since there is no "Universal Alpha" wearable (we may add such a wearable in the future). If you want a transparent bake in one of the new channels to be used to make your mesh partially transparent, you will need to set the alpha mode for that face to "Alpha Blending". For example, in this case there is one universal wearable with a transparent ring texture. The texture is applied to the upper body and left arm channels. The alpha mode is set to Alpha Blending. Results: The upper body and right arm are opaque, because there is an opaque skin layer at the bottom of everything. The left arm is transparent and the transparency is applied to making portions of the left arm see-through: With the same outfit, but alpha mode set to None, you would see this. Note that now the left arm is opaque with a fallback color showing under the transparent regions: If you add an additional universal wearable with a suitable opaque skin texture for the left arm channel, you would get this. Now both arms are opaque, regardless of whether alpha mode is set to None or to Alpha Blending: Working with Animesh Animesh objects are treated somewhat differently when attached. Because they have their own skeletons, they are textured independently of the avatar they are attached to. An attached animesh object does not support Bakes on Mesh, and will display any Bakes on Mesh textures using the placeholder textures described above. Script Support Bakes on Mesh works by defining special texture ids corresponding to each of the bake channels. There are corresponding LSL constants for each of the channels, so you can also write a script that enables Bakes on Mesh for a mesh face. The LSL constants are: IMG_USE_BAKED_HEAD IMG_USE_BAKED_UPPER IMG_USE_BAKED_LOWER IMG_USE_BAKED_EYES IMG_USE_BAKED_SKIRT IMG_USE_BAKED_HAIR IMG_USE_BAKED_LEFTARM IMG_USE_BAKED_LEFTLEG IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX1 IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX2 IMG_USE_BAKED_AUX3 These can be used in commands like llSetLinkTexture() or llSetLinkPrimitiveParamsFast() For example: llSetLinkPrimitiveParamsFast(0, [PRIM_TEXTURE, 0, IMG_USE_BAKED_UPPER, <1.0, 1.0, 0.0>, ZERO_VECTOR, 0.0]); would set the first face of a non-linked prim to use the upper body baked texture. Step-By-Step Example Here we will convert a system avatar into a simple mesh avatar that uses bakes on mesh: 1. Log in using a Bakes on Mesh enabled viewer. 2. Enable the Develop menu. If not present, go to Me > Preferences, and in the Advanced tab click Show Develop Menu. 3. In the Develop menu, choose Develop > Avatar > Character Tests > Test Male. You will now see a standard system avatar. 4. You will need a mesh avatar to replace this system avatar. In a web browser, bring up https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 and download the attached file "aditya_90.dae". 5. In the Second Life Viewer, choose Build > Upload > Model and choose the file "aditya_90.dae". In the upload options, check Include skin weight. Set the model name to "aditya_90". 6. Click calculate weights and fee, then upload. You should now have a mesh model in your inventory called "aditya_90". Attach this to yourself by double clicking it in your inventory. 7. At this point you have a mesh, shown with the white default texture, superimposed on your system avatar. Now we need to convert the mesh to use Bakes on Mesh. This will also hide the system avatar as we go. 8. Right click your avatar and pick edit. In the edit dialog, pick “Select Face”. Click the avatar’s chest to select the upper body. 9. In the Texture tab, click the white texture area. 10. Pick the “Bake” texture option and the “BAKED_UPPER” value in the pulldown. Then click OK. 11. Your avatar should now show the upper body correctly textured without excess white material. What you are seeing is the mesh surface textured with the upper body baked texture. The system avatar for the upper body is hidden. 12. Now repeat the process for the other body regions. Select face on the head area and set it to used BAKED_HEAD Select face for each of the eyes and set them to use BAKED_EYES Select face for the lower body and set it to use BAKED_LOWER 13. Getting all the faces selected and modified correctly is a bit tricky. If something gets messed up just try again with any face that gets messed up. At the end the avatar should look like this: 14. The hair looks wrong because it is an attachment that was not built for this mesh. You can get rid of it by right clicking and choosing Detach. At this point, you have a mesh avatar that’s fully configured to use Bakes on Mesh. You can now customize it the same way you would with the system avatar. For example, take off an item of clothing: Or customize something like eye color using the sliders: If you want to return to the system avatar appearance, just detach the mesh: Test Content There is some example content to help creators who want to get started with Bakes on Mesh: https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 attached file "Aditya_for_BOM.dae" is an uploadable model file with separate faces for the left arm and left foot, so it can be used with the new left arm and left leg channels. https://jira.secondlife.com/browse/BUG-139234 attached file "aditya_90.dae" is an uploadable model that has the original set of faces defined, corresponding to head, upper body, lower body and so on. Left limbs and right limbs will display using the same textures with this model. Known Issues The following known issues are present in the initial full release of Bakes on Mesh: BUG-225518 "The Bake texture on linked objects is shown with a delay of 5-7 seconds when linked objects are added from the ground". This is a lag in the update of appearance for a newly attached object using Bakes on Mesh textures. BUG-227532 "[BOM] some mesh objects render alphas incorrectly using BAKED_SKIRT when system skirt has a transparent texture in local edit modes". This is a transient graphics issue seen when in local edit mode, when customizing your avatar. Goes away when you leave local edit. BUG-227533 "[BoM] alpha layering errors in local edit mode". Some objects may show incorrect alpha masking behavior in local edit. Goes away when you leave local edit. BUG-227534 "[BoM] baked texture offset values on a sphere skew in local edit modes". Transient issues with texture offsets while in local edit, similar to issues seen in previous non-BOM releases. These issues resolve when you leave local edit. BUG-227535 "[BoM] Using the skirt channel in a universal wearable breaks the length of any existing system skirt". If your avatar has a system skirt (skirt wearable), and you are using a universal wearable with a skirt channel texture, then the length of the skirt will display incorrectly as maximum length. This is an issue with the baking service rather than the viewer itself. BUG-227537 "[BOM] When Alpha Wearable is applied, BoM attachments with Alpha mode: None turn red". If you make your avatar invisible using an alpha wearable, and then apply this invisible baked texture to an attachment using Bakes on Mesh, you get a solid color, red, shown on the attachment. Probably this should be the base color of the attachment instead. BUG-227536 "[BOM] Avatar does not cast accurate shadow if Alpha mode = Alpha blending". This is a pre-existing issue with alpha blended objects attached to avatars, but may be seen more often with Bakes on Mesh.
  10. 3 points
    Before you start Registering for and installing Second Life Your first steps inworld Basic skills Finding cool stuff to see and do Doing more Moving on In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Türkçe Русский 日本語 Before you start Important: You must install a standalone program, the Second Life Viewer, to enjoy the rich 3D content in Second Life. The installation process is quick and easy, but your computer must meet the System Requirements. Second Life will not run on systems that fail to meet these requirements. Registering for and installing Second Life Follow this quick three-step process to register for and install Second Life. 1. Choose your starting avatar and provide your account information Your avatar is how you will appear in Second Life. You can choose from a wide selection of avatars, and if you change your mind later, don't worry—you can select a different avatar any time you want! Once you learn Second Life, you can also customize your avatar to your heart's delight, or pick from a vast selection on the Second Life Marketplace. Your username is the account name that you use to log in to Second Life. It has to be unique, so you may not get to choose a simple or common name. Later, you can also choose a display name that everyone sees in addition to your username. For more information, see Usernames and Display names. Warning: Choose your username carefully! Once chosen, you can't change it. Although you can designate a "display name," your username will still be visible, and others may use it to refer to you. Fill in your remaining account details including your email address, date of birth, and password. Make sure to use a memorable security question in case you forget your password! Note: When you create your account, you will receive a message in your email asking you to verify your email address. Verify your address in order to receive offline messages from other Second Life Residents. 2. Choose your membership level Choose a free basic account, or sign up for a premium account for additional benefits. With a premium account, you get your own private Linden Home (if you're at least 18 years old), virtual currency rewards, exclusive virtual goods, and many other benefits. For more information on premium accounts, see Premium membership in the Second Life Knowledge Base. If you choose a basic account now, you can always upgrade to premium membership later. 3. Download and install Second Life To enjoy the rich 3D content in Second Life, you must download and install the Second Life Viewer, an application that runs on Windows and Mac OS. Most web browsers will download the installer automatically; if that does not happen, just click Download & Install Second Life. You may need to run the installer program manually after downloading. Your first steps inworld Now that you've registered for Second Life and installed the Second Life Viewer, you're ready to start your adventure in the virtual world—or "inworld," as we call it. Logging in Start the Second Life Viewer and then log in to Second Life by entering the username and password you selected when you registered. If you have problems logging in, see Login failure in the Second Life Knowledge Base. The first time you log in, you will be in an area known as Learning Island, set up especially for new users. Follow the signs and simple instructions to learn the basic skills you'll need. The following sections describe the most important parts of the Viewer and how to get the most out of your experience. To help you get going, I'll give you a quick introduction to the Second Life Viewer, the program you use to experience Second Life. Basic skills Some of the first things you'll want to learn how to do include: Walking Flying Changing your view Text chatting Changing your avatar Interacting with objects Finding out more about nearby people Controlling inworld media Walking There are four ways to make your avatar walk: Click to walk. Simply click on the ground at the point to which you want to go. If your mouse pointer turns into a hand instead of an arrow, you won't move but will instead interact with the object under your mouse pointer. See the Interacting with objects section. Use the arrow keys. The up-arrow ↑ and down-arrow ↓ keys walk you forward and backward, respectively. The left-arrow ← and right-arrow → keys turn you left and right, respectively. Use the W, S, A, and D keys. The W and S keys make you walk forward and backward. The A and D keys turn you left and right, respectively. Make sure you click inworld first so that the chat field doesn't have focus. Otherwise, you'll be typing chat text instead of walking. Click the Walk/Run/Fly button to open the Movement controls. You can click which direction you'd like your avatar to move, as well as toggle between walk, run, and fly modes. Running To run forward, simply double-click the W or up-arrow ↑ key. To run backward, double-click S or the down-arrow ↓ key. Flying Flying in Second Life is really fun, and it lets you move around much faster than you can by walking or running. To fly, press and hold the Page Up key or the E key. Press and hold the Page Down key or the C key to land. Use the same keys to move through the air as you do to walk. Note: Some regions don't allow flying. In these areas, you'll see this icon in the location bar and you won't be able to fly. Keyboard shortcuts See Keyboard shortcuts for a quick reference guide. Changing your view By default, your view is from directly behind and slightly above your avatar. However, it's often useful to see things from a different viewpoint! There are several ways to change your view: To rotate your view, click and drag anywhere on the world. NOTE: If your mouse pointer turns into a hand before you click, then you'll interact with the object instead of rotating your view. To zoom in, press and hold the Alt key, then click and drag your mouse; or use your mouse wheel. To orbit, press and hold the Alt and Control keys, then click and drag your mouse. Click the View button and use the controls, shown at left. To return to the default view, press the Esc key. Text chatting . Click the Chat button (by default in the bottom toolbar) to text chat with people nearby. Everyone within twenty meters of you will be able to see what you type. To shout, press Control-Enter instead of Enter after typing your chat text. Everyone within 100 meters will be able to see what you type. Click the triangle icon in the chat field to show recent chat history. Mouse over names in chat history and then click the icon for more options. Changing your avatar Click Avatar to change your avatar to one of the free provided avatars. You'll be able to choose from a wide variety of avatar looks. For information on customizing your avatar, see Editing your appearance. Interacting with objects To interact with any object you encounter, right-click it and select from the menu of actions and tools, as shown for example above. Some objects (such as furniture) automatically provide a "sit" icon when you mouse over them. Simply click on the object to sit on it. To stand up again, just click the Stand button that appears near the bottom of the window. If your mouse cursor turns into a hand when over an object, you may be able to interact with the object by clicking on it. In some cases, clicking performs an action (such as turning on a light switch); sometimes, the object displays a special menu that lets you select from a variety of actions. When you hover your mouse cursor over an object, you may also see an information box, for example as illustrated at left. Click on the icon for additional options. Finding out more about nearby people To find out about those nearby, mouse over their avatars and click the icon that appears. You'll get an information box with: Their avatar name and how long they've been in Second Life. Profile "biography" information (if they've added it). Voice chat volume control for that person only. A View full profile link t osee more options and information. See the Using Profiles section. Controlling inworld media Many areas in Second Life have music playing for ambience, or video displayed on an inworld surface. Use the controls in the upper right of the Viewer window to control the volume of the audio or, if you like, to turn it off entirely by de-selecting the box to the right. The Pause button to the left of the main volume control button allows you to start or stop streaming videos or media. You can cover your mouse over any streaming media playing inworld for additional controls. Mouse over any inworld surface displaying video or other media to show special media controls. Finding cool stuff to see and do Click Destinations to see the Second Life Destination Guide. Click on a category, then click on a destination in that category to teleport there immediately. Go to http://secondlife.com/destinations/ to see more categories and destinations. Doing more Once you become familiar with walking, flying, and the other basic functions, you may want to try: Using voice chat Making friends Seeing nearby people and friends Using profiles Using voice chat Tired of typing? Use voice chat to talk to nearby people. You'll need to set up a headset or speakers and a microphone. Using a headset avoids annoying echoes of your own voice. Generally, it's best to connect your audio devices before you start Second Life. After you have connected your headset (or speakers and microphone), you may need to configure your sound devices. To do this, choose Me > Preferences > Sound & Media. You'll be able to select your input and output devices and change your volume setting. Once you have configured your sound devices, simply click Speak to speak to those nearby. Click it again to turn off your microphone. If you're having trouble getting voice chat to work, see Voice chat FAQ. Note: Some regions disable voice chat. In these areas, the Speak button will be dimmed, and you won't be able to use voice chat. Voice dots You can tell if voice is enabled and working properly because you'll see a small white dot floating above your name tag, as shown below. If other people have voice enabled, they will have voice dots as well. Making friends To make someone your friend, mouse over their avatar, click the and choose View Full Profile, then click the Add Friend button. This person will receive a friendship request: if they accept it, then they will be on your friends list, and you will be on theirs. How to accept or decline a friendship offer When someone else offers you friendship, a dialog box appears in the lower-right corner of your screen. If you click Accept, your new friend receives on-screen notification that you have accepted the friendship offer. If you click Decline to cancel the offer, the other person receives a notification that you declined the friendship offer. Tip: Strike up a conversation or have some interaction before asking someone to be your friend—it's good manners! Seeing nearby people and friends Click the People button to open the People window, which has four tabs: NEARBY shows everyone within 100m of you. MY FRIENDS shows your friends list, with those currently online shown first. MY GROUPS shows information on your Second Life groups, which are like clubs. See Groups overview for more information. RECENT shows everyone with whom you recently communicated via instant message or group chat. In all of these tabs, a person's name appears dimmed if they are not currently online. Mouse over a person's name for additional options: Click to see more information about the person; then click View full profile for more options. The mini-map in the NEARBY tab shows a bird's eye view of the area you're in; the yellow dot shows your location, and the green dots represent other people. Zoom in and out with your mouse wheel or right-click the map for more options. Using profiles Click Me > Profile to edit your profile. Use your profile to express your personality and interests. You can also share things with your friends and see things they share with you, similar to social networking sites. You can link your Second Life profile with your accounts on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and other popular social networks. To view someone else's profile, mouse over their avatar, click , then click View full profile. You'll be able to see the things they have allowed based on their privacy settings. To configure your privacy settings: Click Me > Profile Click Edit Profile to customize your profile settings. Click the Privacy tab. Tip: Want to add a profile picture? You'll need to save a snapshot to your PC first, or you can upload an existing snapshot. Adding a Profile picture is a great way to show off your avatar. (Remember, profile pictures must be General maturity!) Moving on Once you've mastered the basic skills covered in this article, you're ready to move on to learn the full richness of the Second Life experience. Have a look at the Second Life User's Guide. Most importantly, have fun!
  11. 3 points
    What is a store manager? What can a store manager do? What can a store manager not do? Adding a manager to your store Removing a manager from your store Changing a manager's additional permissions Monitoring store managers' actions Audit logs Email alerts Viewing stores that you manage What is a store manager? A store manager is a Resident you have designated to manage some operations of your store in the Second Life Marketplace. What can a store manager do? Store managers can perform many of the same actions as the store owner, including: Edit the store's details Edit product details List unlisted items View store and product details At the store owner's discretion, managers may also: Redeliver orders Change product prices Unlist products Add or remove revenue distributions Add or remove listing enhancements. What can a store manager not do? Store managers may not: Archive products Add or remove other managers Perform management actions for which they have not been given permission If a store manager does not have permission to change prices, unlist an item, or change automatic redelivery, those fields appear as inactive in the edit and bulk edit pages. Similarly, the associated controls do not appear for store managers that do not have permission to unlist items, add/remove revenue distributions, or add/remove listing enhancements. Adding a manager to your store You may add up to five managers to your Second Life Marketplace store. You must be friends in order to add someone as a store manager. To add a manager to your Marketplace store: Visit the Second Life Marketplace while logged into the Second Life website. Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. On the left side of the page, under Store setup, click Edit store information. On the Edit store information page, under Store Managers, click Add Manager. In the Manager field, enter the username of the Resident you would like to make a store manager. (You must use the Resident's full username and not their display name. See Usernames and display names for information about the differences between user names and display names.) You must be friends with the Resident. (Optional) Check boxes next to any additional permissions you would like your store manager to have: Product redelivery - The manager can redeliver orders, as well as change the automatic redelivery option on copy-enabled products. Changing product prices - The manager can change the price of a product. Unlisting products - The manager can unlist products. (All managers can list products.) Adding/removing revenue distributions - The manager can add and remove revenue distributions. Adding/removing listing enhancements - The manager can add, remove, and modify listing enhancements. Click Add to add the store manager to your Second Life Marketplace store. Enter the manager's full Second Life name, then choose additional permissions before clicking Add to add them as a store manager. Removing a manager from your store Visit the Second Life Marketplace while logged into the Second Life website. Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. On the left side of the page, under Store setup, click Edit store information. On the Edit store information page, under Store Managers, find the name of the manager you would like to remove and click the Delete button next to their name. The store manager is removed immediately. To remove a store manager, click the Delete button next to their name. Changing a manager's additional permissions In order to change a manager's additional permissions, you must remove the manager and then add them again with the updated permissions. Monitoring store managers' actions You can keep track of your store managers' actions in the following ways: Audit logs Your store's audit logs provide a history of actions taken by your store managers. For each action, you can determine: What action was taken Which manager took the action What product the action affected (if applicable), and At what time the action took place Note: When you add or remove a manager, the action is logged with you as the manager. Your actions are not otherwise shown in the audit logs. To view your store's audit logs: Choose My Marketplace > Merchant home from the top menu bar. In the left column, under Inventory, click View audit logs. The audit logs can be sorted by column by clicking the column headers. Each page of audit logs displays up to 50 entries. From your Merchant home, click View audit logs to view store managers' activity. Email alerts You can choose to receive email alerts when a store manager performs one of the following actions: Changes a listing's price Adds or removes revenue distribution Adds or removes listing enhancements To enable email alerts: Choose My Marketplace > My account from the top menu bar. In the left column, click Email settings. Under Merchant Notifications, set Store manager action alert email to On. Click Save Email Settings. On the Email settings page, you can choose whether to receive email notifications for various store manager actions. Viewing stores that you manage If you are a store manager for one or more stores, you can view the stores you manage by choosing My Marketplace > Manager home from the top menu bar. This link only appears if you have been designated as a manager of at least one store in the Second Life Marketplace.
  12. 3 points
    Starting with Second Life Viewer 4.0, the internal web browser of the Second Life Viewer has been updated to use the Chromium Embedded Framework. This allows content creators to use a much wider array of web technologies in their products for Second Life, including Adobe Flash. However, in order to use Flash in the Second Life Viewer, you must first install a specific version of the Adobe Flash Player on your computer. Installing the Adobe Flash Player for use with Second Life To install the Adobe Flash Player on your computer for use with Second Life: Make sure that plugins are enabled in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Preferences from the top menu bar, then clicking the Setup tab of the Preferences window. Enable plugins should be checked. Visit http://get.adobe.com/flashplayer/otherversions/ using your web browser. Under Step 1, select your operating system. Under Step 2, select FP 20 for Opera and Chromium - PPAPI. Click the Download now button to download the Flash Player installer. Run the Adobe Flash Player installer and follow the instructions onscreen to complete the installation. Restart the Second Life Viewer. You may now view Flash content in the Second Life Viewer's web browser, and on Shared Media-enabled objects in the Second Life world. Note: At this time, it is not possible to play embedded .mp4 files in Second Life using the Chromium Embedded Framework.
  13. 3 points
    How to build objects Getting started Editing prims Using Shift-drag to copy objects Using the Copy selection feature Using the Content tab Linking objects Linking The Undo Feature In other languages: Français How to build objects This page presents a short "crash course" on building in the Second Life® virtual world. Getting started You can create objects only on land that permits building. Land that prohibits object creation is marked Building/dropping not allowed: when you are on such a parcel, you will see an icon at the top of your screen as shown in the image at right. To begin building: Right-click the ground and choose Build to open the Build window. You can also press Ctrl+4 or Ctrl+B or select Build from the top menu on your Viewer. In the Build window, choose the type of basic shape (or primitive) you wish to create, then click the location inworld where you wish to build it. The shape appears (typically with a resounding "whoosh" sound). Editing prims Use the Build window to move, resize, rotate and otherwise manipulate inworld objects. Tip: Checking Snap to grid in the Build window forces you to position objects on an arbitrary grid. This is helpful in making sure that objects line up correctly and are precisely spaced. The video tutorial below discusses working with the building grid, which is useful for precision in building. Topics include: Turning on the grid Adjusting grid increments Adjusting grid snap-to increments Altering grid length Snapping objects to the grid How to use the building grid from Torley on Vimeo. Moving Right-click an object and select Edit. This opens the Build window to the Object tab. Choose Move to enable the Position function. Click and drag the red/green/blue axes on an object to move it around. Clicking on the red (X), green (Y), and blue (Z) arrows lets you drag the object only along those axes. Rotating Right-clilck an object and select Edit. Choose Rotate in the Build window to bring up the rotation sphere. Click and drag anywhere within the sphere to rotate the object freely along all three axes. Click and drag a specific ring (red/green/blue) to rotate the object only around that axis. Resizing Right-clilck an object and select Edit. Choose Stretch from the Build window to bring up the sizing box. Click and drag one of the white corner boxes to scale the entire object proportionally. Click and drag a red, green or blue box to re-size a prim's length, width or height (respectively) without changing the other dimensions. If the Stretch Both Sides option is checked, the object's opposite corner moves in the opposite direction. If Stretch Both Sides is unchecked, the opposite corner remains in place. If the Stretch Textures option is checked, the object's textures are proportionally resized together with the object. If unchecked, the textures retain their original size. This means that if you are increasing the object's size, the textures repeat rather than stretching to fill the additional area. If you are downsizing, you will see only as much of the original texture as fits on the smaller object. Entering specific values Under the Object tab (shown above), enter specific X, Y, and Z coordinates to move, re-size, or rotate the object. Changes to these values are always based on the center of the object (the point where the red, green and blue axes meet). Advanced edits The Object tab offers several additional options for editing basic prim shapes. Here are some common examples: Path Cut (begin/end): Takes out a slice of the object along its Z axis. You can specify where the cut starts and ends. Hollow: Puts a hollow center in the object starting from the center of the shape and expanding out. You can specify what percentage of the radius is hollow. Twist (begin/end): Puts twists into the object, warping its shape as well as texture alignment. Taper: Reduces the size of the top or bottom sides (x or y axes, negative or positive) of the prim. Top Shear: Shifts (shears/skews) the top surface of the object away from the bottom. You can shift the X and Y axes separately. Dimple (begin/end): Cuts a hole in a sphere from ring of latitude (you specify the percentage) to the top or bottom of the Z axis. The dimple cuts straight to the origin of the object (leaving a cone-shaped hole). Three useful features You may find the following features useful as you build and move objects: Show Hidden Selection - Choose Build > Options > Show Hidden Selection to see the hidden contours and planes of a selected object. Show Light Radius for Selection - This feature shows the range of illumination for a lighted object. To use it: Right-click the desired object and select Edit > Features. Select the checkbox next to Light.The object is now a light source. Choose Build > Options > Show Light Radius for Selection to see how far the emitted light from the object travels. To adjust the distance of the object's emitted light, right-click it, select Edit > Features, and click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the Radius. Show Selection Beam - The selection beam is the line of particles you see when you are pointing at and manipulating objects. The feature is on by default, but if you think it gets in the way, you can disable it: Choose Build > Options and uncheck Show Selection Beam. Using Shift-drag to copy objects You can Shift -drag to copy an object you have permission to copy. This isn't obviously stated in the build tools but is a popular way to copy objects. Here's a simple example: Right-click the ground and choose Build. Click the ground again to rez a generic cube. Right-click the cube and choose Edit. The positioning arrows appear. Hold down Shift , left-click one of the arrow heads, and drag the object. You're dragging the original, and a copy is left behind at the original location. Tip: If you use Build > Undo (Ctrl+Z) after Shift -dragging an object, the original snaps back to its original position — a creative use of selective Undo. You can do this to align it another way. Using the Copy selection feature Copy selection allows you to duplicate selected prims and align them adjacent to each other. For example, if you're copying sections of a wall and Shift -dragging to copy is proving tricky to fine-tune, you may want to take advantage of this alternative. To understand how this works, let's use a simple example: Right-click the ground and choose Build. Click the ground again to rez a generic cube. From the Build Tools window, select Create. Check Keep Tool selected so we can do the following steps repeatedly. Click the Copy selection checkbox. For now, check Center Copy and uncheck Rotate Copy. Now, click on the faces of the cube. Each time you do so, the cube is duplicated, aligned edge-to-edge with a previous cube. Here's what the options do: Center Copy - Copies are centered on the target object, which is useful for neat building in-a-line where you want objects to be aligned along an axis. Otherwise, objects will be placed edge-to-edge, but may be staggered or askew. Note that with curved prims like spheres, this means one of the copy's edges is touching the source, but isn't interpenetrating (overlapping). Rotate Copy - Copies rotate to match the target object, instead of the original values the source object has. This can make it easier to line up something that's already at an angle, such as a house's slanted roof. Using the Content tab If you have permission to modify an object, you ca use the Content tab to:: Drag any objects from your Inventory into the Content folder. Copy or move the contents of an object to your Inventory. Permanently delete objects from the Content folder. To add inventory to the object Content folder: Right-click the object inworld and choose Edit from the pie menu (or press Ctrl-3 and click on the object). Open the Content tab (click More if you can't see it). Drag the desired item from your Inventory into the Content folder. To remove objects from the Content folder: Right-click on the object inworld and choose Open from the pie menu. Use one of the following options: Open your Inventory and drag the contents to your Inventory window. Click Copy to Inventory. Click Copy and Wear. Note: If the contents have copy permissions, a copy is placed in your Inventory. If an object is (no copy), the object will leave the Contents folder and move to your Inventory. Select one or more objects (Ctrl-select more than one object), right-click and select Delete (or press the Delete key on your keyboard) to remove objects without placing them in your Inventory. Important: Objects that are not rezzed, but are instead deleted from a Content folder do not go to your Inventory Trash folder! They are permanently deleted. If the object is (no copy), be aware it will be gone if you select it and press the Delete key! Note: Unlike your own inventory, an object's inventory cannot have two items with the same name. If you copy an item with the same name as an existing item into the object's inventory, the new object will be renamed; e.g. object, object 1, object 2 etc. Linking objects You can link several primitives (prims) together to create one cohesive object. A linked object is, for all intents and purposes, considered one object. It has one name, acts as one object (for example, if physics are enabled on it), and it cannot be broken apart unless you Unlink it. However, a linked object still counts as the sum of its prims when determining your land's object limits. One prim of the object is considered the parent or root link. The name of the parent link is the name of the whole linked object. The inventory of the root prim is, for most purposes, the inventory of the whole object. The center (or origin) of the root prim is the center of the whole object, even if the root prim is not the physical center of the object itself. Vehicle scripts look at the root prim's orientation to determine the "front" of the vehicle. As a result, it is important which prim you select as the root prim. Linking Follow these steps to link together two or more prims: If you are not in the object Editor already, right-click any object and choose Edit, or open the Editor with Ctrl-3. With no object selected in the editor, hold down Shift and click on each prim you wish to link together, one at a time. Make the most important prim and/or scripted prim (root) the last one you select (such as the seat of a vehicle). Then, go to the Tools menu and select Link, or just press Ctrl-L. You can select Tools->Unlink or press Ctrl-Shift-L to break the object apart. Be aware of the following limitations: A linked object cannot exceed 54 meters in any dimension. Normally a linkset can have up to 256 prims; sitting avatars count as one prim each. Vehicles, or any physics-enabled object, cannot have more than 32 prims (sitting avatars don't count toward the physical prim limit). There is no nesting of linked groups. In other words, if you link a third object to two objects already linked and then unlink them it will not yield two groups but three. The Undo Feature Second Life's Undo is used to revert certain changes to an earlier state. While selecting an object, use Build > Undo, or the much quicker keyboard shortcut of Ctrl-Z. Watch this video to learn more: How to use Undo from Torley on Vimeo. Limitations Undo doesn't work if you have: Changed any of the texture settings on an object. (It won't switch back to the previous setting.) Deleted an object. (It won't bring it back inworld.) Added contents to an object. (If you drag a no-copy object from inventory into another object's contents, selecting Undo won't take it out.) This isn't all-inclusive; Undo generally doesn't work for most of an object's parameters. What does undo work on? Undo primarily reverts changes made to the position, size, and rotation of an object. For example, if you accidentally move a sofa inside a wall, undo snaps it back to where it was last. As shown in the video above, Undo can help you retrieve objects lost in walls. If you change the position, size, or rotation of an object using the numerical entry fields in the Build window's Object tab, you must click the object again to bring into focus and make Undo work. You can also use Undo when writing notecards or editing scripts; in this context, it functions similarly to a word processor's, and untypes what you last entered. Undo should also work on attachments. Please note that: Each object has its own independent "chain" of undos which remembers multiple steps. Since this data is stored on our servers, you should be able revert changes to objects inworld even after relogging. Remember that you must specifically select an object to undo changes to that object. (You'll see the positioning arrows and a yellow silhouette glow.)
  14. 3 points
    How to change your preferences to view adult content Getting payment information on file In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe Land and other content in Second Life is rated General, Moderate, or Adult. By default, new Residents aged 18 or older have access to General and Moderate content, and Residents aged 16 or 17 have access to General content. See Maturity ratings for more information about Second Life's rating system. If you are 18 years or older, you may access adult content after enabling it in your viewer preferences. How to change your preferences to view adult content Even if you are 18 or older, you still need to opt in to view adult content. You also need to use Viewer version 1.23 or later to access the maturity preferences. Download the latest Viewer. Tip: At the top of your Viewer, you can choose Help > About Second Life to check your Viewer version. Log into Second Life, then follow these steps in the Viewer to set your maturity preferences: Choose Me > Preferences (or Ctrl-P) and click the General tab. Choose General, Moderate, Adult from the I want to access content rated: dropdown menu. Click OK. Congratulations! You may now visit any publicly accessible land in Second Life, regardless of its maturity rating. Note: If your preferences are not set to allow adult content and you attempt to enter an adult-rated parcel or region, you receive a prompt allowing you to either cancel the teleport or instantly update your access preferences to General, Moderate, Adult. Getting Payment Information on File Landowners may also restrict access to their land to those with payment information on file with Linden Lab. If you have purchased Linden dollars (L$) or bought something on the Marketplace, you already have payment information on file. If you do not currently have payment information on file, or if you are unsure: Log in to your Account page on the Second Life website. Select Billing Information under the Account section on the left side of the page. Select Add a Credit Card, Add a PayPal account, or Add a Skrill account. Enter either a credit card number, a Skrill account, or a verified PayPal account. Setting up a payment relationship with Linden Lab does not constitute a purchase; you will not be charged for placing your information on file with us. Note: Linden Lab only accepts PayPal payments through Verified PayPal accounts. Please check your PayPal Account Overview page or review the PayPal support documentation to ensure your account is a Verified PayPal account.
  15. 3 points
    Prerequisites Cost to upload GETTING STARTED: Uploading your first model Step 1: Choose a model to upload Step 2: Define visual levels of detail Uploading your own LOD files Step 3: Define the model's physics shape Step 4: Upload Options Step 5: Calculate weights & fee Step 6: Upload Bonus section: Rigging options Wearing a model with rigging In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 Note: This is a basic walkthrough of how to upload a model. For full details on the parameters available for uploading a model, see Model Upload UI reference. Update: Viewer version 3.8.1.303230 modified the mesh importer to (optionally) improve debug output, perform name-based LOD association, and handle models with many materials. For additional information on this update, see the official Second Life Viewer release notes. Prerequisites Before you can upload mesh objects, you must: Have payment information on file. You can add payment information by visiting the Billing Information section of your Second Life account page. Have accepted the IP terms on your account page. If you are planning to use the beta grid (Aditi), you must also accept the IP terms there, but do not need payment information on file. Have at least one compatible COLLADA (.dae) file on your computer. You can create your own by using most popular 3D software packages, or, if you have the appropriate rights, you can download models created by other 3D artists from online repositories. Try our sample content page for a free model if you're just getting started. You may check your mesh upload status at any time by visiting your account page on the Second Life website. Cost to upload There is a Linden dollar fee to upload a model; the fee depends on the model's complexity. GETTING STARTED: Uploading your first model If you're new to uploading mesh models to Second Life, here's a quick and easy set of instructions to get you started. Don't worry about the myriad of controls in the upload window for now; they're for Residents who want fine control over their model's appearance and physics. For a more detailed breakdown of the upload procedure, keep reading below. To upload a mesh model: Choose a .dae file stored on your computer by choosing Build > Upload > Model. If you don't have any models on your computer, you may download some from the sample content page. Preview your model's automatically generated levels of detail on the Level of Detail tab by clicking High, Medium, Low, and Lowest. Notice how the object's complexity is reduced at each level. Click the Physics tab and choose Lowest from the dropdown menu in Step 1: Level of Detail. Step 2 and Step 3 are not required. Click the Upload options tab and check the boxes for any additional features on your model, such as textures. Click Calculate weights & fee, then review the resource weights, land impact, and Linden dollar upload cost of your model. Click Upload to upload your model to Second Life. Tip: To avoid spending Linden dollars while experimenting with uploading models, you may wish to use the Second Life Beta Grid (Aditi). The Beta Grid allows you to test new features and experiment with potentially costly designs in a safe environment, using a copy of your Second Life account. Actions taken on the preview grid cannot affect your inventory or L$ balance on Second Life's main grid. Step 1: Choose a model to upload Second Life accepts COLLADA (.dae) models, which can be edited and created in many popular 3D modeling packages. If you do not currently have any COLLADA models on your computer, you may download some from the sample content page. To begin uploading a model: Choose Build > Upload > Model... Select the .dae file on your computer and click Open. In the Upload Model window, enter a suitable name for your model in the Model name field. If your model includes textures, check the Textures box underneath the Preview pane to make sure the textures are displayed properly. Step 2: Define visual levels of detail Levels of detail determine what your model looks like from various distances. As you get farther away from a model, it renders in less detail to boost visual performance. Second Life generates these lower detail models by default, but you may use this step to tweak each level or even upload your own lower detail models. You can preview your model at any level of detail by clicking High, Medium, Low, or Lowest. While previewing your model at each level of detail, you may change the parameters used for simplifying it from your original model if you chose Generate from one of the Source dropdown menus. For full details on Triangle Limit and Error Threshold, see Upload Model UI reference. Uploading your own LOD files You may upload your own simplified models by choosing Load from file from the Source dropdown menus. You may wish to create your own lower-detail models in order to preserve critical details that may be lost during the automatic simplification process. The mesh uploader uses very strict naming rules for these custom LOD files: File names ending with "_LOD2" must be used for Medium level of detail File names ending with "_LOD1" must be used for Low level of detail File names ending with "_LOD0" must be used for Lowest level of detail File names ending with "_PHYS" must be used for the model's physics shape Additionally, material names must match exactly between each level of detail. Some 3D modeling programs such as Blender automatically change material names to prevent duplication when multiple versions of a model are loaded into the same scene. Material names are sorted alphabetically upon importing a model from the 3D modeling program of your choice, and may not retain the order they had in the original model. If material order is important to your model, you must name them accordingly. For more detailed information on uploading mesh models with multiple materials, see Uploading a multi-face mesh on the Second Life Wiki. Note: If you need to upload an old model that does not conform to these LOD naming rules, you may enable the debug setting called ImporterLegacyMatching in the Second Life Viewer. Access the Debug Settings window by choosing Advanced > Debug Settings from the top menu bar. Step 3: Define the model's physics shape A model's physical shape, as interpreted by Second Life's physics engine for calculating collisions, can be different from its visual shape. For example, you may wish to simplify a very complex vehicle into a square physical box shape, which allows you to have a visually complex vehicle that requires comparatively little physics computation and does not overtax the region's ability to process moving physical objects. You may upload your own physics representation as a .dae file or you may use Second Life's analysis and simplification tools to generate a physics shape automatically. The quickest way to generate a physics model for your object is to choose Use Level of Detail and select a level of detail from the dropdown menu. This creates a physics model based on one of your model's visual levels of detail. Remember that lower physics costs are desirable, so choose the lowest level of detail that reasonably represents the shape of your model. You do not need to complete Step 2: Analyze or Step 3: Simplifiy unless your physics model is extremely complex or shows red lines in the preview window. For advanced information on usage of the physics analysis and simplification tools, see Upload Model UI reference. Step 4: Upload options Before you upload, make sure to include any necessary optional parameters on the Modifiers tab: Scale: Changes the base size of your model. Increasing the scale increases the resource cost. Include Textures: Includes any textures applied to the COLLADA model. The textures are automatically applied to the Second Life version of the model when it is uploaded. Include Skin weight: Includes any skin weight information in the COLLADA model. This option only applies to models that are meant to move and flex with your avatar when worn as avatar attachments. Include Joint positions: Includes joint position information from the COLLADA file. This option only applies to models that are meant to alter an avatar's joint positions when worn as an attachment. Pelvis Z Offset: Changes the vertical positioning of a rigged model. Step 5: Calculate weights & fee When you click Calculate weights & fee, Second Life calculates the download, physics and server weights of your model in order to determine its land impact and Linden dollar upload cost. The base Linden dollar cost to upload is L$10 plus L$10 for each texture applied to the model, and an additional cost based on the complexity of the model. For more information about weights and land impact, see Calculcating land impact. Step 6: Upload When you upload a model, it appears in the Objects folder in your inventory. As with all objects in Second Life, you can then drag it from your inventory to the ground, or you can wear it as an attachment. Bonus section: Rigging options Rigged models allow you to represent your avatar skeleton as a mesh that conforms to your joints and motions. This means that you can wear a rigged model that changes the length and orientation of your avatar's limbs and animates accordingly. If your COLLADA model contains joint position and skin weight information, you can preview how it will look with an avatar's default idle animation by checking the Skin weights box underneath the Preview pane. Wearing a model with rigging You may wear a rigged model by right-clicking it in your inventory and selecting Wear. You may often wish to pair a rigged model with an alpha mask to hide your avatar's normal shape.
  16. 2 points
    Benefits of premium membership Upgrading to a premium account Linden Homes Linden dollar rewards Sign-up bonus Weekly Linden dollar rewards (stipend) Stipends for old accounts Premium virtual goods (gifts) How to get your premium virtual good Object permissions on premium virtual goods How to get help for premium virtual goods Frequently asked questions I didn't receive the previous virtual good, and the kiosk only provides the most recent one. Can I get the one I missed? Can I take multiple copies of a good from the kiosk? I accidentally deleted my premium virtual good. Can I get it back? Premium sandboxes Other premium benefits Live chat support Right to own land in popular mainland areas Immediate access to adult-only areas Increased number of group memberships Preferred access to highly populated regions Downgrading or canceling your premium membership Downgrading from premium to a basic membership Canceling your account You may still be charged for land In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português Русский 日本語 Benefits of premium membership Premium membership provides the following benefits: Your own private Linden Home Linden dollar rewards Exclusive virtual goods Premium-only sandboxes Live chat support The right to own mainland parcels in popular areas Immediate access to adult-only areas Maximum number of group memberships increased from 42 to 70 Preferred access to highly populated regions, utilizing increased region capacity Access to premium-only events and experiences Voice morphing Cap on missed instant messages increased from 15 to 80 L$ transaction history increased from 32 days to 90 days Upgrading to a premium account To upgrade from basic to premium membership: Log into the Second Life website. On the left side of the screen, click Premium Membership. The Change Membership Plan screen opens, displaying a chart of Membership plans and prices. Select Premium (choose from Monthly, Quarterly, or Annual billing options). Click Save Changes. Your new plan becomes effective at your next billing date. Note: As a Premium member, you get a one-time bonus of L$1000 and receive a weekly stipend of $L300 and a 1024 square meter premium tier bonus. You may only receive the L$1000 upgrade bonus once per account. Linden Homes Linden Homes are ready-to-move-in homes that belong to a themed community and are available only to premium account members. Note: Linden Homes are available only to Residents at least 18 years old. For more information on Linden Homes, see Overview of Linden Homes. Linden dollar rewards As a premium member, you get a sign-up bonus and a weekly stipend of Linden dollars. Sign-up bonus When you register for a premium account, you get a sign-up bonus of L$1,000, deposited directly into your Second Life account once your premium membership has been active for 45 consecutive days. Weekly Linden dollar rewards (stipend) As a premium member, you receive a weekly stipend of $L300, whether you log in or not. Stipends are paid every week on Tuesdays. Payments are based on information gathered from the database as of the preceding Monday. For example: If you create a premium account on Monday, April 14, you will receive your first stipend on Tuesday, April 15. If you create a premium account on Tuesday, April 15, you will receive your first stipend on Tuesday, April 22. Note: Stipend payments may appear late in the day on Tuesdays or possibly not until Wednesday. Stipends for old accounts The stipend amount for older accounts depends on what type of account you have and its age. Premium accounts created or upgraded from basic: On or after November 1, 2006 receive L$300 per week. Between July 21, 2006 and November 1, 2006 receive L$400 per week. Before July 21, 2006 receive L$500 per week. Certain old basic accounts get a stipend; basic accounts created Before June 6, 2006 receive a stipend of L$50 per week, if they log in that week. After June 6, 2006 do not receive a weekly stipend. Premium virtual goods (gifts) As a premium member, you periodically get an premium virtual good as a benefit. The premium virtual goods are designed by Residents commissioned by Linden Lab. How to get your premium virtual good To get your premium virtual good, go to one of the inworld vending kiosks listed in the Second Life Destination Guide: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts. If you are logged in to the website, go to https://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts instead. To use one of the kiosks: Right-click the kiosk. Choose Buy. (You won't be charged—the item is free for premium account holders.) The item is transferred to your inventory. The inworld vending kiosks only provide the latest premium virtual good. You cannot get older ones. Object permissions on premium virtual goods Premium virtual goods are no modify, no transfer, copy, meaning you can make copies but cannot modify or transfer the items. For general information on object permissions, see Object permissions. How to get help for premium virtual goods Premium virtual goods are commissioned by Linden Lab and designed by Residents. Please do not contact the creator for support. Each premium virtual good comes with an FAQ notecard to help you get started and answer common questions. If you still have an unanswered question, email premium_feedback@lindenlab.com. We will update the notecard as needed, but cannot provide individual responses. Frequently asked questions I didn't receive the previous virtual good, and the kiosk only provides the most recent one. Can I get the one I missed? No, the premium gift vending kiosks only provide the current premium virtual goods. Can I take multiple copies of a good from the kiosk? Yes! As a premium member, you can take as many copies of the premium virtual good as you like. I accidentially deleted my premium virtual good. Can I get it back? Yes. As long as the next premium virtual good has not been distributed, you can get it from an inworld kiosk. Premium sandboxes A sandbox is an area put aside for building practice. Much like real sandboxes and conceptual sandbox games, these are spaces of creativity and chaos. For more information on sandboxes, see Building tips. Several sandboxes exist for specific purposes—such as the Weapons Testing Sandbox—but the majority are simply for regular building. Signs within each sandbox area make it clear what kind of activities are allowed there. Sandboxes usually have auto-return enabled to clean themselves several times a day; look for auto-clean information before building, so you aren't caught by surprise. Since sandboxes are experimental, they may also be unstable—be sure to take regular inventory backups of anything that's important. Premium sandboxes are accessible only to Residents with premium membership. Each sandbox is made up of four regions. Generally, there is one sandbox per Linden Home continent. Find the premium sandboxes through the Second Life Destination Guide: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/sandboxes. Other premium benefits Premium membership provides additional benefits: Live chat support Residents with premium accounts may initiate a live chat for support issues via the support portal. Basic accounts do not qualify for this kind of support. Right to own land in popular mainland areas Residents with a premium account can buy mainland parcels and need to pay a monthly tier when their land exceeds 1024m². For more information, see Land Use Fees. The mainland is the largest connected land-mass in Second Life, consisting of hundreds of regions connected to one another with roads, railroads and open oceans. Being a premium member is a prerequisite for owning mainland parcels. Immediate access to adult-only areas Linden homes and some adult areas are accessible only to those 18 years and older. If you are 18 years or older when you sign-up for a premium membership you will automatically have access to these areas. For more information, see Age-restricted content and Accessing Adult land and content. Increased number of group memberships Residents with a premium account may be a member of up to 70 groups at a time. Basic accounts may only join up to 42 groups. Preferred access to highly populated regions Regions in Second Life have a bonus capacity to allow region owners, estate managers, and Residents with Premium accounts to enter an otherwise full Region. The default limit on the number of avatars allowed in a region is as follows: Full Regions support an extra 10% (100 to 110) Homesteads support an extra 25% (20 to 25) Open Spaces support an extra 20% (10 to 12) For full details on access to bonus region capacity, see Improved Region Capacity and Access on the Second Life Blog. Downgrading or canceling your premium membership Downgrading from premium to a basic membership To downgrade your premium or Concierge account to basic, follow these steps: Log into the Second Life website. On the left side of the screen, select Premium Membership. The Change Membership Plan screen opens, displaying a chart of Membership plans and prices. Select Basic Account. Click Save Changes. Your new plan becomes effective at your next billing date. Warning: If you downgrade to a basic account, you will lose all the land you own, and you will no longer have access to your weekly Linden dollar stipend or live chat support. Make sure to sell all your land before you downgrade! You may also wish to check your group land contributions and make arrangements to keep your group's land holdings in good standing. Note: If you are a member of more than 42 groups, you will not lose any group memberships when you downgrade. However, you may not join any new groups with a basic account until you reduce your group memberships to fewer than 42. Canceling your account When you cancel your account, it is deactivated and you will lose access to it at your next billing review date. If you're thinking about canceling your account entirely, consider leaving it active with a basic membership, which costs nothing to maintain. If at some point in the future you should choose to revisit Second Life, your avatar and your inventory will be here waiting for you. You can cancel your account by going to the Delete Account page after logging in with your Second Life username and password. This link is also accessible through the Account section on the left of your Dashboard. Once logged in, select the reason why you have chosen to delete your account and then find the Cancel Account button at the bottom of the page. Your account will remain open until your billing review date, as account maintenance fees are paid in advance. Tip: If you want to keep your name, avatar, and inventory for possible future use but don't want to pay the reactivation fee, you can downgrade to a free basic account instead of canceling your account altogether. You may still be charged for land If you cancel or downgrade your account from premium, you may still be charged for your current month's land holdings. As stated on the Land Pricing & Use Fees page: Thus you are always charged for your premium membership and the maximum amount land you owned during the current billing cycle, regardless of whether you cancelled your account before the end of the month. Note: When you cancel your account, it remains active until the end of your payment period. You may still log in and use Second Life during this time. For instance, if you buy a yearly Second Life membership and cancel it the next day, you are still be treated as a premium member for the next year!
  17. 2 points
    Creating a store Listing items for sale The Marketplace Listings window Version folders Stock folders Creating a new listing Changing versions of a listed item Changing the item associated with a listing Previewing your store Delivering items to the buyer Store managers Third-Party Viewer developer resources In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português 日本語 This article explains the basics of how to get started as a merchant on the Second Life Marketplace. Once you are familiar with these steps, check out How to market your products for tips on how to make your business stand out, or learn about Managing your Marketplace store. Creating a store The first step to becoming a merchant is to create your store on the Second Life Marketplace. Your store is where customers can browse and purchase items you have listed for sale. Once a purchase is made, the items are delivered directly to the buyer's inventory in Second Life and the proceeds are added to your Linden dollar (L$) balance. To create your store: Make sure your Second Life account is at least five days old and has payment information on file. On any Marketplace page, click My Marketplace in the upper-right and click Create a Store. Read the Marketplace Terms of Service carefully, check I agree to the Second Life Marketplace Fee and Listing Policies, then scroll down to the bottom and click Continue. (Optional) Customize your store profile to make it more attractive and easier to find. Restart your Second Life Viewer before attempting to upload items to the Marketplace website. Listing items for sale Once you have set up your Marketplace store and restarted the Second Life Viewer, you can begin using the Marketplace Listings window to manage your store's inventory. Make sure you understand Second Life's next owner object permissions before listing your items for sale; these permissions allow you to control how your object may be copied or redistributed after you've sold it. The Marketplace Listings window Video Tutorial: Learning Listing, Version, & Stock Folders The Marketplace Listings window is an extension of your Second Life inventory that allows you to manage all inventory in your Second Life Marketplace store. By dragging and dropping items from your inventory window into the Marketplace Listings window, you can immediately begin setting up new listings, add updated versions of your existing products, and even list or unlist items on the Marketplace Store. You can access the Marketplace Listings window by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar of the Second Life Viewer. Version folders Each Marketplace Listing folder contains one or more version folders that allow you to easily manage updated versions of a product without creating a new listing. Version folders look like normal inventory folders with three lines drawn on them, like this: . Only one version folder may be active at a time for each listing; when a customer buys your product, they receive a copy of the active version folder and its contents. To activate a version folder for a Marketplace Listing, right-click the appropriate version folder and choose Activate. If a listing folder contains only one version folder, it is activated automatically. Currently active version folders are marked by the word "(active)". Note: When you drag objects from your regular inventory to a version folder, they are moved, not copied. This means that they no longer appear in your main inventory and will be lost permanently if deleted from their respective version folder. You may instead copy an item from your inventory to the Marketplace Listings window by right-clicking the item in your inventory and choosing Copy to Marketplace Listings. Stock folders You can use the Marketplace Listings window to sell a limited stock of no-copy items. No-copy items that you drag into the Marketplace Listings window are automatically placed into a stock folder. Stock folders look like normal inventory folders with a grid of squares on them, like this: . Stock folders also show the number of items they contain next to their names. For example, "Example Crate (stock=7)". Each stock folder must be inside a version folder, and represents the sale of a single item in the listing, even though there may be many items inside the stock folder. For example, if your active version folder consists of a copiable notecard and a stock folder containing 25 no-copy objects, each customer will receive a copy of the notecard and one randomly selected object from the stock folder until no items remain in the stock folder. The no-copy items within a stock folder must be of the same inventory type, but may have different names. For example, some identical limited-run items may have serial numbers written into their object names, but they can still be sold from the same stock folder. Note that while it is still possible to sell a limited quantity of copiable items using the appropriate listing field, the quantity of items available from a stock folder is determined by the number of items in the folder and cannot be changed using the Available quantity listing field. When a stock folder runs out of no-copy items, the Marketplace de-lists your listing and sends an email alert reminding you to add more units. Creating a new listing Video Tutorial: Creating a New Listing Follow these steps to create a listing for a new product on the Second Life Marketplace: Open the Marketplace Listings window in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar. Open your Inventory window by choosing Me > Inventory from the top menu bar. Drag your product from the Inventory window to the section of the Marketplace Listings window labeled Drop folders here to create new listings. It now appears under the Unassociated tab. Under the All or Unassociated tabs, right-click the listing folder containing your product and choose Create listing. The folder is moved to the Unlisted tab and now displays a listing number. Under the All or Unlisted tabs, the single version folder inside the listing folder is automatically made active. Right-click the listing folder or version folder and choose Edit listing to fill out the required listing fields on the Marketplace website. If you try to list your product before filling out the required listing fields, you will receive an error message explaining which fields still require input. Click the Update button to save your listing. On the All or Unlisted tab of the Marketplace Listings window, right-click the listing folder and choose List to list your product on the Second Life Marketplace. You may list or unlist items from the Marketplace website as well. Changing versions of a listed item Video Tutorial: Updating a Listing As you develop updates for your products, you can easily update your Marketplace listings with the new items without deleting the older versions: Open the Marketplace Listings window in the Second Life Viewer by choosing Me > Marketplace listings from the top menu bar. Open your Inventory window by choosing Me > Inventory from the top menu bar. Drag your updated product from your Inventory window to the listing folder for that product in the Marketplace Listings window; this creates a new, inactive version folder containing the updated product. Right-click the new folder and choose Activate to make it the active version folder for that listing. All new sales through the associated Marketplace listing will deliver products from the active version folder. At any time, you can revert your listing to sell a previous version of your product by right-clicking its version folder and choosing Activate. Changing the item associated with a listing Video Tutorial: Migrating Listings & Checking for Errors Under rare circumstances, you may need to completely change the item associated with a Marketplace listing. The most common reason for needing to change the item associated with a listing is accidental deletion of the inventory folder associated with a listing and need to re-associate items with an existing listing. To associate a listing folder with a pre-existing Marketplace listing: In the Second Life Viewer, choose Me> Marketplace listings. Find the listing number in parentheses next to your existing listing. For example, "Example Crate (3757)". Click the Unassociated tab of the Marketplace listings window. Right-click an unassociated item you wish to associate with your listing and choose Associate listing. In the Associate Listing window that appears, enter the listing ID of your existing listing and click OK. The unassociated item now replaces the existing item (if any) in the Marketplace listing. Note that changing the item associated with a listing in this way causes the item to become unlisted because you are replacing the active version folder. You will need to activate a new version folder and re-list the item as described in Creating a new listing. Previewing your store After you have listed at least one item, you can preview your store: On the Marketplace website, go to My Marketplace > My Store. This is how your customers see your store — but it also helps to browse the Marketplace as an alt to really walk in your customers' shoes. Important: To see items in your store that you have listed as Moderate or Adult content, make sure you set Show maturity levels to General, Moderate, Adult when you search! Delivering items to the buyer The Marketplace automatically delivers items for you. Occasionally, the delivery system fails, and a delivery gets lost on its way to the customer. If that happens, you can easily redeliver the item. Store managers A store manager is a Resident you have designated to manage some operations of your store in the Second Life Marketplace. Store managers can perform many of the same actions as the store owner, taking allowing them to take on some of the burden of managing your store. For full details on store managers, see Second Life Marketplace store managers. Third-Party Viewer developer resources There are two API wiki pages targeted at Third-Party Viewer developers. This API documentation is helpful for developers who want to integrate Marketplace features into their Third-Party Viewers, but is not necessary for most Marketplace merchants or their customers: Marketplace API for VMM AIS V3 API
  18. 2 points
    Movement View Communicate System General For advanced users Shortcut keys differ between PC (Windows and Linux) and Mac not just in Second Life, but across applications in general. PC shortcuts are indicated in the tables below. For your convenience, here's a table showing how modifier keys for keyboard shortcuts translate between platforms: PC Mac Ctrl Cmd ⌘ Alt Opt ⌥ Shift Shift Right-click Right-click (Ctrl-click with a single-button mouse) Movement Walk forward W or ↑ Walk backward S or ↓ Turn left A or ← Turn right D or → Run Double-tap W or ↑ (forward); S or ↓ (backward) Always run Ctrl+R Jump E or PgUp (Tap once) Toggle flying F or Home Fly up Hold E or hold PgUp Fly down Hold C or hold PgDn View Mouselook M Reset View Esc Look at Hold Alt and click mouse to re-center Zoom in Ctrl+0 Zoom default Ctrl+9 Zoom out Ctrl+8 Zoom camera in Alt+↑ Zoom camera out Alt+↓ Orbit up Alt+Ctrl+↑ Orbit down Alt+Ctrl+↓ Orbit left Alt+Ctrl+← Orbit right Alt+Ctrl+→ Pan up Alt+Ctrl+Shift+↑ Pan down Alt+Ctrl+Shift+↓ Pan left Alt+Ctrl+Shift+← Pan right Alt+Ctrl+Shift+→ Communicate Friends Ctrl+ Shift+F Local chat history Ctrl+H Look at last speaker Ctrl+\ Gestures Ctrl+G Previous message entered* Ctrl + ↑ Next message entered* Ctrl + ↓ *Available in Nearby Chat, Group Chat, and Instant Message windows. System Undo Ctrl+Z Redo Ctrl+Y Cut Ctrl+X Paste Ctrl+V Duplicate Ctrl+D Select all Ctrl+A Deselect Ctrl+E Close window Ctrl+W Close all windows Ctrl+ Shift+W General Preferences Ctrl+P Help F1 Search Ctrl+F World Map Ctrl+M Mini-map Ctrl+ Shift+M Teleport home Ctrl+ Shift+H Inventory Ctrl+I Build Ctrl+B Upload image Ctrl+U Take snapshot Ctrl+ Shift+S Quit Second Life Ctrl+Q For advanced users It is possible to remap the Second Life Viewer's keyboard controls, but be aware that the procedure is risky and can compromise the Viewer's functionality. To learn more, read our wiki article on Keyboard mapping.
  19. 2 points
    Registration May I browse listings without registering for Second Life? How do I register for Second Life? Second Life Auctions and "My Account" Can anyone in Second Life buy land in the auctions? Does the land I win in auction count against my land allocation? Can I bid on land if it would put me in a higher land tier? Can I bid with L$ that I don't have? Bidding How do I bid? How do I increase my bid? Why doesn't my bid show up online after I bid? How will I know if my bid is no longer winning? How will I know if I win? How can I view all bids I've submitted? Why did a bid from earlier today beat my bid? Can I submit a bid offline? What if an auction ends with no bids? Collecting Your New Land How will I know when I can take possession of the land? How do I take possession? Is it possible to avoid tiering up by releasing other land before confirming a new higher tier? Resolving Auction Problems What if I bid in an auction and realize I have made a mistake? Who do I contact if I have a problem? In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português For a walkthrough of the auctions feature, see Land auctions. Registration May I browse listings without registering for Second Life? You may browse as much as you'd like without signing up for Second Life. In order to bid on an auction, you will need to have an active Premium Second Life account with verified billing information and a verified email address. Please login to Your Account on the Second Life website to verify your email address and upgrade your account to a Premium account today! How do I register for Second Life? Visit Join Second Life to register for a Second Life account; basic account creation is free, so you can explore land before you upgrade. Second Life Auctions and "My Account" Can anyone in Second Life buy land in the auctions? No. Only residents that have Premium memberships are eligible to participate in auctions. Your account must also have a Verified email address and a Linden dollar (L$) balance sufficient to make a bid. Does the land I win in auction count against my land allocation? Yes. Before you bid, be sure you are comfortable with paying any additional monthly fee ("tiering up") that might be triggered. You can review your land allotment by viewing Your Second Life Account. Can I bid on land if it would put me in a higher land tier? Yes. You are automatically assigned to the tier (possibly increasing your monthly billing amount) when you win. The auction will inform you if winning the auction will modify your tier requirement (but note that each auction evaluates this independently; if you are bidding in multiple auctions, they will not take that into account). Can I bid with L$ that I don't have? No. You must have the Linden dollars available in your account at the time of bidding, because if you submit a new high bid, your maximum bid amount is held in escrow until you are either outbid or you win the auction. Bidding How do I bid? After you review the listing information for the item that interests you, click Bid on This Property. Enter your maximum bid, and then click Confirm. How do I increase my bid? To increase your bid, go to My Auction Activity and choose the bid you want to increase. You can only increase your bid if you are not currently the leading bidder. Can I decrease my maximum bid? Once you have bid, you cannot decrease your bid amount. The only way to exit an auction where you are the leading bid is for someone to outbid you. Why doesn't my bid show up online after I bid? My Auction Activity should show your bid as soon as it is entered. If it doesn't appear, you may be viewing an old version of the page. Try clicking your browser's Refresh or Reload buttons. How will I know if my bid is no longer winning? We send you an email and return your escrowed funds when you are outbid. However, there can be unpredictable delays in email transmission. We suggest that you regularly visit our website to check your bidding activity on the My Auction Activity page. How will I know if I win? We will notify you by email if you win. How can I view all bids I've submitted? Go to My Auction Activity page and use the filter to find your previous bids. Why did a bid from earlier today beat my bid? If your maximum bid is for exactly the same amount as some earlier bidder's maximum, the earlier bidder wins (if their maximum is higher, their bid will be increased to your maximum plus the bid increment). Can I submit a bid offline? No. Only online bids can be made. What if an auction ends with no bids? If an auction ends with no bids, the original owner retains ownership of the parcel and is responsible for any tier fees owed on it. Collecting Your New Land How will I know when I can take possession of the land? Ownership of the parcel should be set to the winner within an hour after the end of the auction. If there is a problem with the ownership, contact Customer Support. How do I take possession? The parcel is assigned to you inworld once the auction ends. Is it possible to avoid tiering up by releasing other land before confirming a new higher tier? To avoid the possibility of higher tier charges, reduce your land use prior to participating in an auction. Land won in auction is delivered to the winning account and affects peak land use immediately. Resolving Auction Problems What if I bid in an auction and realize I have made a mistake? Please bid carefully. All bids are final and cannot be cancelled. The only way you can leave an active auction where you have bid is if you are outbid. Who do I contact if I have a problem? You should file a ticket through the Support Portal at Second Life Help.
  20. 2 points
    Avatar types Which clothing fits which avatar types? Determining your avatar type General tips: Try on a piece of classic avatar clothing and see if it appears correctly Information for merchants How to label your clothing for sale Marketplace instructions Why create a brand to support clothing fit for your custom avatar? Example situations for clothing merchants In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Português Italiano 日本語 As Second Life has evolved, so have the avatars that inhabit the Second Life world. With the introduction of fitted mesh technology for avatars, it has become more complicated to determine whether or not a piece of clothing will display properly on your own avatar. This article will help you to determine whether your avatar is a Classic avatar, Standard mesh avatar, or a custom/branded avatar, and which types of clothing will fit each. Avatar types For the purposes of fitting clothing, avatars can be classified into three categories: Classic - Classic avatars are the original default Second Life avatars. They have a modifiable humanoid shape, and can wear clothing in the form of textures and attachments added to that shape. Most of a classic avatar's appearance and clothing can be modified by pressing the Appearance button in the Second Life Viewer, but cannot take advantage of newer graphical features such as normal and specular maps. Standard mesh - A standard mesh avatar is a classic avatar that is wearing a rigged mesh attachment, usually a full-body avatar, and whose classic body is hidden by a full body alpha mask. It is classified as "standard" if it was created using the standard fitted mesh model available on the Second Life wiki. Custom/branded - A custom avatar is a classic avatar that is hidden by a full body alpha mask and is wearing a customized rigged mesh attachment or attachments that otherwise replace the classic avatar body. These avatars can come in a wide variety of shapes and sizes, and each model typically requires clothing specifically designed to work with such an avatar. Which clothing fits which avatar types? Clothing may be labeled in one of the following ways to indicate which types of avatars it is most likely to be compatible with: Classic only - The "layer-based" textured clothing applied directly to classic avatars. This clothing type only displays properly on classic avatars and is rendered completely invisible by the alpha mask worn by most mesh avatars. Mesh only - An attachment that is designed to appear as clothing on a standard mesh avatar. It may appear to be a layer-based texture, but does not work properly on classic avatars. Mesh only clothing must be created outside Second Life in a 3D modeling tool. Classic/Mesh - Attachments primarily designed for standard mesh avatars that can be made to work on a classic avatar. In order to be classified as classic/mesh, the clothing must include an appropriate alpha mask designed to hide the affected parts of a classic avatar. Branded - A catch-all term meant to encompass the many possible custom avatar designs. Such avatars can typically only wear clothing specifically designed for that specific avatar; therefore each custom designed avatar and its compatible clothing may be considered a "brand". Likewise, clothing designed for a custom avatar shape should not be expected to work properly with classic or standard mesh avatars, or even other custom avatars. Determining your avatar type If you are new to Second Life or rigged mesh avatars, you may have a difficult time trying to determine which type of avatar you are currently using. Here are some tips on determining whether you have a classic, standard mesh, or custom mesh avatar: General tips: Check the name of your avatar or any notecards delivered with the avatar for details on how it was created and what type of clothing may be compatible with it. Ask the merchant who sold the avatar which type of clothing works best with it. Try on a piece of classic avatar clothing and see if it appears correctly When all else fails, there are a few procedures you can try in order to determine which type of avatar you have. Every avatar in Second Life has access to a shared library of items, some of which are outfits composed of clothing for classic avatars. By trying on some classic clothing and observing the results, you can find out whether you have a classic avatar: Log into Second Life and open your inventory by clicking the Inventory button. Find the Library folder in the Inventory window and expand it by clicking the triangular arrow next to it. Expand the Clothing folder in the library. Expand the Male Shape & Outfit folder inside the Clothing folder. Click the item called Boy Next Door Shirt and then press the Wear button at the bottom of the Inventory window. The shirt is then applied to your classic avatar shape. If you have a classic avatar, a gray shirt with blue stripes should appear on your avatar; if you have a mesh or custom avatar, the shirt will not appear on your avatar or may be partially obscured by the avatar's mesh body. Determining whether you have either a mesh or custom avatar can be more difficult, since both are composed of 3D models created outside Second Life and use similar techniques for hiding the default classic avatar. When standard mesh avatars become available in the inventory library, you may use clothing from those outfits in a technique similar to the method described above for determining whether you have a classic avatar. Information for merchants How to label your clothing for sale In order to help shoppers find clothing that properly fits their avatars, merchants can label their merchandise as described above in Which clothing fits which avatar types? Clothing for custom avatars should be similarly labeled by the seller as being compatible with a particular avatar brand. Marketplace instructions The Second Life Marketplace also provides fields for merchants to mark their clothing as compatible with classic, mesh, or branded avatars. To edit these fields as a Marketplace merchant: Click My Marketplace and choose Merchant Home. On the left side of the page, click Manage listings. For each clothing or accessory item you sell under Manage listings, click Actions and choose Edit. On the Edit Item Listing page, you may check boxes under Clothing Works With for clothing that is compatible with Classic Avatars or Mesh Avatars. If you are selling a custom avatar, or clothing that works with a specific custom avatar, you can provide that avatar's brand name under Custom Avatar Brand and provide a URL with brand information under Brand URL. Why create a brand to support clothing fit for your custom avatar? Mesh avatars that are not built using the standard mesh model provided by Linden Lab can usually only wear clothing specifically designed for that custom avatar. By creating a recognizable brand for each custom avatar you sell, you can help your customers identify which clothing and accessories will work with your products. Branding could be described as a way to group together custom avatars and their compatible accessories in order to prevent customer confusion about what clothing will fit their avatars. For example, if a merchant sells a custom avatar called Paper Panda, customers should look for clothing and accessories marked as compatible with the Paper Panda brand. Attempts to wear clothing designed for classic, standard mesh, or other custom avatars would most likely yield disappointing results and wasted Linden dollars (L$). Example situations for clothing merchants The following examples cover some of the possible situations merchants may face when selling an item of clothing in Second Life, and provide suggestions on how to handle communicating what type of avatars each clothing item will fit. If the clothing was developed inworld by clicking Edit my Outfit: On the Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing item only works on Classic avatars. In the clothing folder name, include the words "Classic avatars only" or similar. Linden Lab recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was designed to fit the standard fitted mesh shape and you do not wish to make the clothing work on classic avatars or create the necessary alpha masks: On the Second Life Marketplace, mark the clothing as Mesh avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing only works on mesh avatars In the folder name, include the words "Mesh avatars only". LL recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was designed to fit the standard fitted mesh shape, and has also been tested on a classic avatar with appropriate alpha masks to make the clothing look correct: On the Second Life Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic and Mesh avatars. Inworld, convey that this clothing works with both mesh and classic avatars, provided that classic avatars use the included alpha masks. In the folder name, include the words "Classic and mesh avatars". LL recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. We do not recommend using the words "all avatars" because this clothing will not necessarily work with custom avatars, and may not work with avatar types introduced by Linden Lab in the future. If the clothing is mesh but was not designed to fit the standard mesh shape, and comes in preset sizes to match the variable size of classic avatars, including alpha masks where necessary: Some rigged mesh clothing pre-dates the fitted mesh feature in Second Life and has special sizing considerations. Merchants should take any steps they feel necessary to communicate proper fit for this type of clothing. Often, this type of clothing has been designed to fit classic avatars only. On the Second Life Marketplace, mark this clothing as Classic avatars only. Inworld, convey that this clothing only works on classic avatars. In the folder name, include the words "Classic avatars only". Linden Lab recommends this practice to help customers find compatible items in their inventories. If the clothing was created for a specific custom avatar: On the Second Life marketplace, mark this clothing as Custom and convey which brand the clothing is intended for. Inworld, convey which brand the clothing is for. In the clothing folder name, and/or in a notecard, include information the customer needs in order to locate the branded avatar.
  21. 2 points
    Adding attachments to your avatar Editing attachments Removing attachments from your avatar Any object in your inventory can be attached to your avatar and worn as part of an outfit. Examples of attachments include customized hair, jewelry, shoes, weapons, and other accessories. Attachments may contain scripts, but they do not count against a land parcel's object limit. Adding attachments to your avatar The easiest way to add an attachment to your avatar is to click the Inventory button on the left side of the Viewer window, find ithe attachment in My Inventory, right-click it, and select Wear. This causes the object to attach to your avatar at its last known attachment point and rotation; if you position a hat object on your avatar's head and then remove it, it will reattach itself in the same location next time you wear it. If the object has never been attached to an avatar, choosing Wear attaches it to your avatar's right hand, replacing any attachment that is currently worn on that attachment point. If you wish to attach an object to a specific part of your avatar's body, find it in your inventory, right-click it, select Attach To, and then select an attachment point. Attachments move and rotate relative to the attachment point to which they are attached. For example, a wristwatch object attached to your avatar's left forearm moves with his arm, even if you use the Build Tools to edit its location. To wear multiple attachments on a single attachment point, find an additional attachment in your inventory, right-click it, and select Add or Attach To. Add works similarly to Wear but does not replace existing attachments. Editing attachments You can use the Build Tools to edit or adjust attachments on your avatar. However, some building options (such as linking and physics) are unavailable while the object is attached to your avatar. Residents commonly edit attachments in order to fit hair, clothing and accessories properly to their avatars' unique proportions. Removing attachments from your avatar To remove an attachment from your avatar, find it in your inventory, right-click it, and select Detach From Yourself. Objects worn by your avatar appear in bold text in your inventory along with a note showing where each object is attached. You can also right-click directly on the object and select Detach. Note: Remember that you can only remove objects made of prims; you cannot take off any body part but must replace one with another of the same kind, or edit the one you're wearing. For more information, see Editing your appearance.
  22. 2 points
    What is abuse? Reporting abuse Merchant fraud and other scams Setting privacy preferences If the person is nearby inworld If you are being physically pushed inworld If you are being harassed by an object Finding the object with beacons Finding invisible objects Finding underground objects Other tips Dealing with the object If you are being animated Preventing abuse on your land If you are a parcel owner If you are a region or estate owner / manager Additional tips In other languages: Deutsch Français Español Português Italiano 日本語 Türkçe Русский What is abuse? Abuse occurs when someone or something intentionally harasses or bothers you in violation of the Second Life Terms of Service (ToS) or the Community Standards (CS). Abuse is also sometimes referred to asgriefing. Fortunately, in Second Life you control many aspects of your environment: You control your avatar and what it experiences. The best way to prevent harassment or abuse is to use your settings to control your environment and who can interact with you. Important: When you are the subject of abuse or harassment, stay calm and follow the steps outlined in this article. Don't panic! Reporting abuse Although it won't stop an ongoing incident, please report cases of abuse. Choose Help > Report Abuse to file an abuse report. Provide as much detail as possible. For more information, see Filing an abuse report. Tip: You can report a person or object for abuse by right-clicking on them and choosing Report Abuse. Doing this automatically logs the subject's name and exact location in the abuse report. Merchant fraud and other scams In addition to inworld griefing, be on guard for shopping fraud and other scams, both inworld and in Second Life Marketplace. If something sounds too good to be true, it probably is. See also: Tips for safe shopping Scams Phishing FAQ Transactions and disputes between Residents Setting privacy preferences You have a lot of control over what others can see about you in Second Life. Doing this can help to prevent unwanted intrusions and harassment. To set your privacy preferences in the Second Life Viewer: Choose Me > Preferences Click the Privacy tab. Set your preferences. Click OK. For more information, see: Privacy concerns. Online Safety Guidelines If the person is nearby inworld First, simply ask the person to stop their abusive activity. If that doesn't work, try leaving the area. You may wish to put a a safe location in your Viewer's favorites bar for quick access. Finally, you can block the person: Right-click the offending avatar and choose Block. See Blocking for more information. Blocking stops voice and text chat and any visual interference from their avatar and their objects. If you have enabled avatar impostors in your graphics preferences, blocking an avatar also replaces it with a flat gray outline (an "impostor"). Choose Help > Report Abuse and file an abuse report about the incident. Provide as much detail as possible. See Filing an abuse report for more information. If you are being physically pushed inworld If someone (or something) is pushing you or physically assaulting you inworld, sit down! Sitting prevents most physical forces from affecting your avatar. Simply right-click on the ground or something else nearby and choose Sit Here. If you're being harassed in voice chat If someone is harassing you in voice chat, mute them as follows: Choose Communicate > Voice settings... to open the VOICE SETTINGS window. Mouse over the listing for the person you want to mute. Right-click their name and choose Block Voice. If you are being harassed by an object Finding the object with beacons If you are being griefed by an object emitting particles or sounds, do the following: Select World > Show > Beacons. The BEACONS window opens. Under For these objects: select Sound sources andParticle sources. Now objects emitting sounds are shown in yellow and objects emitting particles are shown in blue. Click the ?button in the BEACONS window for more details. Finding invisible objects If you see the beacons but not the source object: Choose World > Show > Advanced Menu to enable the Advanced menu. Chooose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility > Highlight Transparent or press Ctrl-Alt-T. Doing this makes invisible objects visible and highlighted red. You can see many particle and sound sources with this tool. Finding underground objects To see objects stuck underground: Choose Advanced > Rendering Types Deselect Surface Patch or press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-5. Doing this hides the ground so that you can see beneath it. Other tips The following may also help: Choose Advanced > Disable Camera Constraints, to let you to move the camera beyond normal parameters. Deselect Advanced > Limit Select Distance, to let you to select objects normally outside your reach. Dealing with the object Once you locate the griefing object, block it. This stops all sound and text chat from the object: Right-click on the object. Choose Manage > Block. Tip: To hide bothersome particles, choose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility > Hide Particles or press Ctrl-Alt-Shift-= You can also try to contact the owner of the object. Right-click on the object. Choose Object Profile. Click on the owner's name to view their profile. Click IM button in their profile and ask them to remove or edit the object. If you are being animated If you are being animated against your will, choose Me > Movement > Stop Animating Me. Preventing abuse on your land If you are a landowner, there are a number of things you can do to prevent abuse and harassment from occuring on your land. Both parcel and region owners can restrict entry to people who are at least 18 years old. For more information, see Age restriction parcel and estate management features. If you are a parcel owner If you have the necessary rights, you can restrict who can enter your land, and freeze, ban, or eject others from land you own or control. For more information, seeManaging other Residents on your land. It's good practice to deselect Object Entry. This stops people from dropping or shooting objects onto the land, and prevents moving objects from crossing into it from a neighboring parcel. You can also restrict who is able to build on your land: Choose World > About Land or just right-click on the ground and choose About Land. Click the OPTIONS tab. Deselect Allow other Residents to: Build. If you are a region or estate owner / manager As a region owner or an estate manager, you have even more control over who can access your land and what they can do on it. As an estate manager, you can restrict access to certain Residents or group members, ban specific Residents, kick out a specific Resident, and so on. To access these controls: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Estate tab. As a region owner or manager, you can block people from editing terrain (terraforming), flying, pushing, and so on. To access these controls: To access these controls: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Region tab. Additional tips If you are experiencing a griefing attack, and need time to kick and ban troublemakers: Choose World > Region / Estate. Click the Debug tab. Select Disable Scripts and Disable Collisions. Note: Disabling scripts will temporarily stop all scripted objects in the region from functioning. However, as soon as you re-enabled scripts for the region, they will resume normal operation again.
  23. 2 points
    Adding someone to your Friends list How to accept or decline a friendship offer Video tutorial Friendship etiquette Partnering How to make someone your partner How to end a partnership Partnership history Letting friends edit your objects The group method The friend method A few things to note In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano Português 日本语 Adding someone to your Friends list There are several ways to add a friend: If you are near the person inworld, just right-click their avatar and select Add Friend. If you are not nearby or if the person is offline, click the People button at the bottom of the Viewer window and select the FRIENDS tab. Then click the + button to open a search window and type in your friend's name. When you add a friend, the Add Friend window enables you to enter a custom message. Use this space to explain why you would like to be friends, or to remind the person how you know each other. Once a friendship offer is accepted, your names appear in each other's FRIENDS lists. All friendships are bidirectional, so if you delete a friend, you no longer appear in that friend's list. How to accept or decline a friendship offer When another Resident offers friendship to you, a dialog appears in the upper-right corner of your screen. The dialog also appears in the Conversations window as an instant message from the sender. If you click Accept, your new friend receives an onscreen notification that you accepted the friendship offer. Click Decline to cancel the offer. The other person receives onscreen notification that you declined the friendship offer. Friendship etiquette Completing your profile and reading other Residents' profiles provides ample opportunity for conversation. If you get along well, feel free to offer friendship. For unofficial Resident tips about socializing and making friends, see SLetiquette. Partnering Second Life couples can make their relationships official. Whether you're married or just connected, you can designate your partner on your profile inworld and make your relationship visible to the rest of the community. Note: Creating a partnership costs each partner L$10. Partnership is a vanity display for social purposes only. It does not alter inworld permissions, group abilities, support benefits, and so forth. For example, if you are on a Premium account and your partner is on a Basic account, he or she does not receive any Premium benefits. Partnering also does not affect your Second Life username. Nor does it entitle you to share your partner's Second Life account. For more information on our policies regarding sharing accounts, see Permitting Others to Access or Transferring Second Life Accounts. How to make someone your partner To make someone your partner, follow these steps: Go to the Partners page. Enter your Partner's username. Type in your Proposal to your to-be partner. It can be a love letter, song lyrics, or whatever suits the both of you best. Click Send Proposal. Your potential partner is notified at the email address linked with their Second Life account. He or she has seven days to accept. Once the proposal is accepted, your names appear in one another's profiles. The partnership email should be received in seconds. Please check your spam folder and other email filters to make sure it isn't being hidden. If you receive a partnership request you wish to decline, you can do so on the Partners page. How to end a partnership The person who "divorces" is charged L$25. Follow this procedure to dissolve a partnership: Open the Partners page. Select "I, (your name), would like to dissolve my partnership with (your partner's name)." Click Submit. Your partnership is dissolved and your now-ex-partner is notified. Once you have dissolved a partnership, you can recreate it by following the procedure previously outlined and paying the L$10 again. Partnership history Your Viewer profile does not show you the date you started your partnership, so keep your original partnership request (sent via email) if you wish to have a record of the date. Letting friends edit your objects There are two ways to enable a friend to edit your objects in Second Life. This is often referred to as collaborative building or collaborative creation. It's a useful way to let groups of people collaborate on a building project together. The method you choose depends on whether your collaborator is in a group or whether he or she is your friend. The group method To enable a member of a group you are in to edit your objects: Right-click the object and choose Edit. The object editor opens. Click on the General tab in the editor. If you can't see the tabs, click on More. Click on the Tool icon to the right of Group and assign the object to the group your friend is in. Click OK. Select the checkbox next to Share. Any other group members will also be able to edit the object. Group members can only edit objects that are shared with the group. Note: If you want other group members to be able to take copies of your object, make sure you set the next owner permissions (Copy, Modify, Resell/Give away) appropriately. The friend method To enable a friend to edit your objects: Click in the toolbar. The PEOPLE window opens. Click the FRIENDS tab to open your friends list. Mouse over your friend's name and click to view your friend's profile. In the profile page that appears, click and choose Permissions. Under Allow (friend's name) to: select Edit, delete or take my objects. Click Save. Important: Doing this gives your friend the same rights that you have to edit all of your objects. A few things to note There are a few things you should be aware of: Your collaborative partners can only edit objects you've rezzed. Nobody but you will ever have access to your inventory, so if you want someone else to edit an object that you own, you need to rez it inworld first. Your collaborative partners can't edit the next-owner permissions on an object they've been granted access to. It isn't technically possible to link two objects together if they have different owners, even if the owners have given each other edit permissions. Your collaborative partners cannot edit your objects if they have Select Only My Objects enabled under Build > Options in the top menu bar.
  24. 2 points
    Normal maps Specular maps Advanced techniques and technical details Normal and specular maps in Second Life are texture layers that convey additional rendering information to the graphics engine. This additional information is used in conjunction with standard "diffuse" textures to add a whole new level of detail to otherwise flat surfaces without drastically increasing either land impact or graphical or server lag. Tip: Applying a normal or specular map to an object does cause the object's land impact to be calculated using the standard land impact parameters rather than prim count. However, the maps themselves do not contribute to the land impact rating. Normal maps Normal mapping is a method of simulating the lighting of bumps and dents on an otherwise flat surface, creating the illusion of a physically detailed surface. In Second Life, this technique can be used to add detail to a geometrically simple object without significantly increasing the object's land impact or sacrificing graphical performance. The normal map itself is stored as a texture, with the red, green, and blue values representing the X, Y and Z coordinates of the surface normal. To apply a normal map to an object you own in Second Life: Right-click the object and click Edit. Click the Texture tab in the Build Tools window. Click the Texture (diffuse) dropdown menu and select Bumpiness (normal). Click the box above the word Texture to open the Pick: Texture window. Choose a normal map texture from your inventory and click OK. The normal map is applied to your object. Specular maps Specular mapping is a method used to define the shape of shiny or reflective areas on a surface. For example, if a textured surface represents a wooden box with metal parts, a specular map can be applied to define only the metallic portions of the texture as shiny. In Second Life, specular mapped surfaces reflect light cast by either the sun or local lights. Specular maps are stored as RGBA textures; The reflected color is tinted by the RGB value (a red specular map reflects white light as if it is red), and the alpha channel conrols the intensity of the reflected environment map. To apply a specular map to an object you own in Second Life: Right-click the object and select Edit. Click the Texture tab in the Build Tools window. Click the Texture (diffuse) dropdown menu and select Shininess (specular). Click the box above the word Texture to open the Pick: Texture window. Choose a specular map texture from your inventory and click OK. The specular map is applied to your object. Increase Glossiness to increase the reflectiveness of your specular mapped area; increase Environment to increase the intensity of the reflected environment map. Glossiness and Environment are also modulated by the alpha channel of the specular map. Tip: If you want to access the Glossiness, Environment, and Color controls for your entire object without applying a specifically shaped specular map, you may click the Blank button in the texture picker for a completely white texture. Advanced techniques and technical details You can find case studies, advanced techniques, and technical details on Second Life's normal and specular mapping features at the Good Building Practices portal on the Second Life wiki.
  25. 1 point
    Finding land on which to rez objects Find the box in your inventory Open and unpack the box Wear or rez your purchased items Why does it tell me "Can't rez object..."? Unpacking a box on your avatar In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Русский Did you buy something from the SL Marketplace or inworld and wonder why you received a box? As in, "I bought a necklace but all I got was a picture of a necklace on a box?" Don't worry! Second Life items are sometimes sold in simple containers that require you to "open" them to get the contents. For example, if you purchase clothing that comes in a box, you must extract the clothing objects from the box container, then transfer them to your inventory so you can wear them. Don't wear the box. Remember, you have to open the box and use its contents. If you accidentally wear the box and it's attached to your avatar, simply right-click the box and choose Detach. Finding land on which to rez objects To open and unpack the box your purchase was delivered in, you need to be on land where you have permission to rez the box. If you're unsure if you have permission to do this where you are, just visit a sandbox where everyone has permission to rez objects. Click on a sandbox from this list, such as Sandbox Island. On the SLurl page that appears, click Teleport Now. A Place Information window appears in your Second Life Viewer. Click Teleport to travel to the sandbox you've chosen. Many stores also have a specially-sectioned "rez zone" inside, where autoreturn time is often set to a few minutes prevent litter from accumulating while giving you enough time to unpack. Find the box in your inventory Recently received items appear in the expandable Received items pane in the INVENTORY window. To access them, open your inventory and click the Received items bar to expand the pane and view your recently received items. You may click and drag these items into your main inventory or rez them by dragging them to the ground. Open and unpack the box Remember, you must be on land where you have permission to make your box appear by rezzing it. Once you have a place to rez your box, watch this video tutorial to see the steps below in motion: Drag the box from your inventory to the ground to rez it. Right-click the box and choose Open. A window opens. If the box has many contents, it can take a moment. Click Copy To Inventory to transfer the box's contents to your inventory. If the box contains an outfit you'd like to wear immediately, select Copy and Wear instead. Once the items are copied, they appear in your inventory as a folder with the box's name. If you don't see it, click the Recent tab. When you have finished unpacking your box, please remember to either Delete it or Take it back to your inventory to avoid cluttering up the area with boxes. Wear or rez your purchased items Your items are now in your inventory. Locate them and drag them inworld to rez them, or right-click and select Wear if they are clothing or other avatar attachments or components. Why does it tell me "Can't rez object..."? If you try to drag an object from your inventory to inworld and see this error: — it means building and dropping objects isn't allowed on the present parcel. How can you tell? Right-click the navigation bar and choose About Land. Hover over the cube with a universal "no" slashed circle to see "Building/dropping objects not allowed." Alternatively: Choose World menu > Place Profile > Place Profile. In the PLACES window, expand the Parcel section (if it isn't already open). This video shows the steps above: In some cases, if you're a member of the group that owns the land, activating your group title permits you to build despite the no-build icon which applies to the general public. Unpacking a box on your avatar Important: Only do this if you're comfortable dragging and dropping inventory items, or you may accidentally misplace important items. You can unpack a box if it's attached to your avatar. This may be useful if you're having a hard time getting to rezzable land, since you can always attach an object. However, this lacks the convenience of the Copy to Inventory and Copy and Wear buttons. In your inventory, right-click the box object and choose Attach To HUD or Attach To, then select an attachment point. Attach To HUD may be preferable because the box is attached to a point on your screen instead of your avatar and so is less likely to mess up your appearance. Alternatively, you can simply choose Wear, which attaches the box to its attachment point — if none has been specified by the creator, which is typically the case, it gets attached to your Right Hand. Right-click the attached box and choose Edit. In the build tools, click the Content tab. Drag each item from the object's contents to a folder in your inventory. You can also hold Shift or Ctrl to select multiple items. This doesn't work with "no copy" items in contents. Close the build tools.
  26. 1 point
    他の言語 Tiliaとは? Tiliaでの資金の処理(引き出し) 本人確認のための質問 Tiliaに個人情報を提供しなければならない理由とは?また提供した個人情報の利用目的とは? 認められる身分証明書の種類とは? すでに写真付き身分証明書を提出しています。再び提出しなければならない理由とは? 利用している銀行、クレジットカード会社、PayPalのいずれかによってすでに本人確認が行われています。Tiliaで再び本人確認をしなければならない理由とは? 社会保障番号を持っていません。手続きを進めるにはどうしたらよいでしょうか? 社会保障番号の提供を希望しない場合どうなりますか? 登録時に本人確認のための情報を求められない理由とは? 身分証明書はいつ求められますか? 資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出することはできますか? この手続きの所要日数とは? 従わない場合、米ドル残高はどうなりますか? 認められる居住地証明とは? 戸籍上の名前(実名)を変更する場合、提供する必要がある書類とは? Tiliaからのメールを確実に受け取るため、登録済みのメールアドレスを更新する方法とは? 身分証明書の提出を必要としない取引とは? Tiliaの利用に関する質問 Second Lifeのアカウントとは別にTiliaアカウントにアクセスできますか? Tiliaから米ドルを銀行口座に直接引き出せますか? リンデンドルの購入にTiliaを利用する必要はありますか? 休眠アカウント維持手数料の支払いを避ける方法とは? 資金を処理できない理由とは? 技術的な質問&法的な質問 個人情報は安全に保管されていますか? TiliaはGDRPを遵守していますか? Tiliaは個人情報を政府と共有しますか? 提供する個人情報はデータマイニングの目的で使用されますか? 米ドル残高は州に帰属されますか? 米ドル残高がTiliaアカウントに残っている状態でSecond Lifeの住人が亡くなった場合どうなりますか? Tiliaとは? Tiliaは、Linden Labの子会社で、Second Lifeコミュニティに特定の金融サービスを提供し、米国の法規制の遵守を徹底するためSecond Lifeを支援しています。 2019年8月1日付けで、Tiliaはお客様の米ドル残高の管理を引き継ぎ、Tiliaアカウントとして管理いたします。今後はTiliaが、お客様のTiliaアカウントからの資金の処理請求とお支払い手続きの処理を行います。現在お使いのSecond Lifeアカウントに関連付けられたTiliaアカウントが自動作成されます。Tiliaアカウントにアクセスするためのユーザー名とパスワードを新たに設定する必要はありません。 Tiliaでの資金の処理(引き出し) 規制要件を遵守するため、米ドル建ての残高の一部をPayPalまたはSkrillのアカウントに引き出す(資金の処理として知られている処理)を希望される場合は、お客様がご本人であることを確認するため、いくつか個人情報をご提供いただく必要があります。必要な個人情報には以下が含まれます。 名前 住所 生年月日 社会保障番号(米国の国籍をお持ちでない場合、政府発行の身分証明書) また、取引を完了するため追加の情報の提供が求められる場合もあります。Tiliaは、情報を何度も提供していただくことのないよう、一度上記の情報をいただきましたら、安全に保管いたします。 注記:18歳未満のお客様は、2019年8月1日以降、18歳になるまで資金の処理ができなくなります。 重要:12ヶ月間Tiliaアカウントが利用されていない場合、休眠アカウント維持手数料を請求させていただきます。本手数料は、アカウントが再び利用されるまで、Tiliaアカウントに毎月請求されます。本手数料に関する詳細は、Tiliaのサービス利用規約のセクション3.4でご確認いただけます。 本人確認のための質問 Tiliaに個人情報を提供しなければならない理由とは?また提供した個人情報の利用目的とは? 金融サービス業として登録している事業体であるLinden LabおよびTiliaには、適用される米国の法規制を遵守することが義務付けられています。継続的なリスク管理プロセスの一環として、当社は金融関連サービスを提供するお客様の個人情報を入手、確認、記録する必要があります。当社はお客様のプライバシーと安全を極めて重要なものであると考えています。このため、お客様の個人情報は継続的に保護され、Linden LabおよびTiliaのプライバシーポリシーに明記されている目的でのみ使用されるものとします。 認められる身分証明書の種類とは? 認められる写真付き身分証明書は以下の通りです。 運転免許証 パスポート 種類を問わず政府発行の写真付き身分証明書 上記のいずれの身分証明書もお持ちでない場合は、当社のカスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせの上、対応についてお尋ねください。 すでに写真付き身分証明書を提出しています。再び提出しなければならない理由とは? Linden Labが提供する金融関連サービスは今後同社の完全所有子会社であるTilia Inc.によって管理されるようになります。Tiliaには適用される米国の法規制を遵守することが義務付けられています。継続的なリスク管理プロセスの一環として、当社は金融関連サービスを提供するお客様の個人情報を入手、確認、記録いたします。お客様の個人情報は継続的に保護され、当社のプライバシーポリシー(当社ウェブサイトよりご覧いただけます)に明記されている目的でのみ使用されるものとします。 すでに情報を提供いただいている場合、住人の方に情報の再提出をお願いすることはほとんどありませんが、ごく稀にTiliaが再び文書を収集、確認する必要があるケースが発生する可能性があります。 利用している銀行、クレジットカード会社、PayPalのいずれかによってすでに本人確認が行われています。Tiliaで再び本人確認をしなければならない理由とは? 金融サービス事業を運営するTiliaには、金融取引に関連する様々な州法や連邦法を遵守することが義務付けられています。また、これらの各種法律によって、お客様がクレジットカード会社やPayPalなど他の金融機関に本人確認のための情報をすでに提供しているか否かを問わず、この情報を収集し確認することが当社に義務付けられています。 社会保障番号を持っていません。手続きを進めるにはどうしたらよいでしょうか? 米国の国籍をお持ちでない場合は、身分証明書としてパスポートおよび公共料金(電気・ガス・水道)の領収書をご利用いただけます。米国の国籍をお持ちで社会保障番号を持っていない場合は、カスタマーサービスまでお問い合わせください。 社会保障番号の提供を希望しない場合どうなりますか? 社会保障番号をご提供いただけない場合、当社はお客様の取引を処理できません。当社には法律によって社会保障番号の収集および確認を行うことが義務付けられています。 登録時に本人確認のための情報を求められない理由とは? 本人確認のための身分証明書に関する情報の収集は、ゲーム内通貨のアカウントの資金を米ドル建てで引き出すなど、一部の金融取引でのみ必要となります。Second Lifeを使用するための登録にあたり本人確認のための情報の収集を義務付ける規制はありません。 身分証明書はいつ求められますか? 資金の処理請求を開始する際および決済方法として登録されている送金先に米ドル建ての資金を送金する際に、身分証明書が求められます。 資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出することはできますか? はい。資金の処理請求を行う前に、確認用に身分証明書を自主的に提出していただくことは可能です。事前にご提供いただくことで、Tiliaで初めて資金の処理請求を行う際に、処理の遅延を確実に防ぐことができます。 Second Lifeウェブサイトの支払情報ページにアクセスしてください。「We may need some additional information in order to process credit from your Tilia account」(Tiliaアカウントからの資金の処理には、いくつか追加の情報が必要となる場合があります」をクリックすると、提出ページにアクセスできます。本人であることが確認されると、表示されるメッセージが「We have all the information we require to process credit from your Tilia account. Thank you!」(Tiliaアカウントからの資金の処理を進めるために必要な情報がすべて揃っています。ご協力ありがとうございます)に変わります。 この手続きに関する詳細は、ブログの「規制で義務付けられている情報の自主的な提出」というタイトルの投稿をご確認ください。 この手続きの所要日数とは? 請求は通常1~3日で処理されますが、場合によっては最長30日の時間を要することがあります。 身分証明書を提出しない場合、米ドル残高はどうなりますか? ゲーム内米ドル残高はお客様のアカウントに残ります。必要な書類を受け取り、確認を行うまで、資金の処理請求は受け付けられません。米ドル残高とリンデンドルは引き続きSecond Lifeのサービス料のお支払いにご利用いただけます。 認められる居住地証明とは? 認められる書類は以下の通りです。また、発行日が3ヶ月以内である必要がありますのでご注意ください。 最新の公共料金(電気・ガス・水道)の領収書 銀行やクレジットカードの取引明細書、資産報告書 携帯電話料金の明細書 賃貸契約書、賃借契約書 納税申告書 有権者登録用紙 保険証明書 必ず明確かつピントが合った書類全体が写っている写真を提出してください。また、必ず必要な情報が写っていることを確認してください。 戸籍上の名前(実名)を変更する場合、提供する必要がある書類とは? お名前が変わる場合には、必ず最新の情報を提出してください。認められる書類は以下の通りです。 氏名変更届 結婚証明書 離婚証明書 同性パートナーシップ証明書 Tiliaからのメールを確実に受け取るため、登録済みのメールアドレスを更新する方法とは? メールアドレスの更新をご希望の場合は、こちらのリンク(https://accounts.secondlife.com/change_email/)をクリックし、更新を行ってください。当社はメールアドレスの確認およびメールアドレスが最新のものであるかの確認を行うことをお客様に推奨しています。 身分証明書の提出を必要としない取引とは? 身分証明書の確認が必要となる取引には、資金の処理請求、すなわち、PayPalまたはSkrillアカウントへの米ドル残高の一部またはすべての引き出し請求が該当します。したがって、通常以下の種類の取引においてお客様に個人情報の提供を求めることはありません。 お支払い方法を問わずリンデンドルのご購入 クレジットカード、PayPal、またはSkrillでのプレミアム会員費や土地使用料などSecond Lifeのサービスに対するお支払い リンデンドルのご利用 LindeX上でのリンデンドルの売却 Tiliaの利用に関する質問 Second Lifeのアカウントとは別にTiliaアカウントにアクセスできますか? 現時点ではできません。TiliaアカウントはSecond Lifeアカウントに統合され、Second Lifeのログイン情報でログインできるSecond Lifeウェブサイト経由でご利用いただけます。Tilia提供のサービスには、その旨がはっきりとわかるように印が付けられる予定です。 Tiliaから米ドルを銀行口座に直接引き出せますか? 現時点でTiliaから銀行口座に資金を直接引き出すことはできませんが、米ドル残高をPayPalやSkrillに引き出すことは可能です。 リンデンドルの購入にTiliaを利用する必要はありますか? いいえ。Tiliaはリンデンドルの購入処理に関わっていません。リンデンドルのご購入には今後も引き続き登録済みのお支払い方法をご利用いただけます。また追加の個人情報の提供は不要です。 休眠アカウント維持手数料の支払いを避ける方法とは? 12ヶ月間Tiliaアカウントが利用されていない場合、3ドル未満の休眠アカウント維持手数料を毎月請求させていただきます。この少額の月額手数料は、お客様のアカウントを維持するために要するエンジニアリング、サポート、会計処理、コンプライアンス関連の維持手数料に充てられます。休眠アカウント維持手数料により、お客様の米ドル残高をマイナスに減らすことはできません。また、本手数料により、新たにクレジットカードに請求が行われることは絶対にありません。休眠アカウント維持手数料は、リンデンドルの残高に影響しません。 Second Lifeウェブサイトで最低12ヶ月に1回アカウントにログインするだけで、休眠アカウント維持手数料を避けることができます。また、プレミアム会員である限り、プレミアム会員の住人に対して休眠アカウント維持手数料が請求されることはありません。 資金を処理できない理由とは? 当社でお客様の個人情報の確認が完了していない場合、資金の処理請求を受け付けることはできません。 技術的な質問&法的な質問 個人情報は安全に保管されていますか? 当社はお客様の懸念を十分に理解しています。お客様の個人情報は、当社のプライバシーポリシーに明記されている通り保護されています。インターネット経由で情報を提供することに抵抗がある場合は、カスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせの上、追加の提供方法についてご相談ください。 お客様の個人情報を保護するために当社が導入している方法に関する詳細は、当社のブログの「Tiliaにおけるプライバシーとセキュリティに関する情報」というタイトルの投稿をご確認ください。 TiliaはGDRPを遵守していますか? Tiliaは、EU一般データ保護規則(GDRP)を徹底遵守しています。詳細については、当社のプライバシーポリシーをご確認ください。ご自身のアカウントや状況について具体的なご質問がありましたら、当社カスタマーサポートまでお問い合わせください。 Tiliaは個人情報を政府と共有しますか? 召喚状や捜索令状など法的措置を受け情報を提供せざるを得ない場合を除き、Tiliaはいかなる政府に対しても情報を提供しません。 提供する個人情報はデータマイニングの目的で使用されますか? Tiliaは一切データマイニングに関わっていません。したがって、お客様のデータがデータマイニングの目的で使用されることや、第三者に販売されることはありません。TiliaはLinden Labの子会社であり、Second Lifeの商取引の基幹システムを強化しつつ、当社のプロセスとお客様の個人情報の保護も強化することを存在意義としています。 米ドル残高は州に帰属されますか? はい。Tiliaは、すべての州の未請求資産(unclaimed property)に関する法律を遵守します。 米ドル残高がTiliaアカウントに残っている状態でSecond Lifeの住人が亡くなった場合どうなりますか? 本トピックに関する当社のWikiの記事「Linden Lab公式情報:Second Lifeの住人の死亡およびその他の懸念事項について」にアクセスし、当社の現行の方針をご確認ください。
  27. 1 point
    Estates versus Private Regions Private Regions overview Additional types of Private Regions Homestead Regions Homesteads for educators and non-profits Land parcels on Homestead Regions Openspace Regions Buying Private Regions Land parcels on your regions Transferring or canceling Private Region ownership Estates overview Transferring or canceling an estate Additional features and controls for Private Regions and Estates Purchasing from the land store Delivery Maturity ratings Guidelines for naming Private Regions Ordering adjacent regions Private Region customizations Initial customizations Customizations after purchase Renting a region for a special event Rental rate Details More information Invoicing for special orders Where to get an invoice Verification information Approval and Private Region delivery Payment Information Converting Regions Tip: To find out who owns a particular region, select World > Place Profile > Region/Estate > Covenant and locate the listing for Owner. If the owner is listed as (none), the region is owned by Linden Lab. Estates versus Private Regions An estate is a term for a group of one or more Private Regions that belong to one Resident. Each square on the map is a region. A Resident can own many estates. An estate can never have less than one region. Regions owned by different Residents cannot be in the same estate. Regions in the same estate share certain common settings, including but not limited to: Ban lists Sun settings Estate managers There are a few other differences: There is no charge to change an estate name, but there is a nominal charge to change a Private Region name. You can request transfer of ownership of regions, but not entire estates. Private Regions overview Private Regions are regions in Second Life that are explicitly paid for and controlled by a Resident. In general, Private Region ownership is an excellent choice for Residents who: Wish to enjoy land ownership separate from the ever-changing Second Life mainland. Want to build and control a Second Life experience with or without adjacent neighbors. Require more land controls than those provided on the mainland. Want to name the region their land is in (within the naming guidelines). Additional types of Private Regions In addition to standard Private Regions, existing region owners may purchase Homestead Regions. Homesteads are less expensive than standard Private Regions but are designed for lighter use and can support fewer objects and avatars than a normal region. You may also choose to convert one or more of your Private Regions into multiple Openspaces or Homesteads, or you may choose to convert some of your Openspaces or Homesteads to different region types. After any conversion, you must always have at least one standard Private Region remaining. For full details on converting between different region types, see Converting Private Regions. Homestead Regions A Homestead is a type of Private Region intended for such purposes as: Low-density rentals Light commercial use Quiet residential use Other specifications for Homesteads include: Available to full region owners only Lower price than a full region Events and classifieds are permitted Comes with lower usage limits than full regions: Land capacity set at 5000 Concurrent avatar limit set at 20 Pricing for Homesteads is as follows: Setup fee of $149 Monthly fee of $109 Homesteads for educators and non-profits We do not offer discounts on any type of Private Regions, but qualified educators and non-profits are allowed to order a Homestead Region without owning a standard Private Region, unlike regular Residents. If you represent a qualified non-profit organization that wants to order a Homestead Region, submit a support case to do so. Land parcels on Homestead Regions Homesteads are approved for rental use within the Region limitations we have set. Openspace Regions Openspace Regions are a type of Private Region intended for light use such as water, hills, or forest. They are not intended for building, home rentals, or events. To own an Openspace Region, you must also own a normal Private Region. Openspace specifications include: Available to full region owners only Lower price than a full region or Homestead Events and classifieds are not permitted Comes with lower usage limits than full regions or Homesteads: Land capacity set at 1000 Concurrent avatar limit set at 10 Pricing for Openspaces is as follows: New Openspace regions are no longer available for sale. Monthly fee of $60 For more information about Openspace Regions, see the article titled Openspace Regions. Buying Private Regions Land parcels on your regions Parcels can be sold to other Residents, but you remain responsible for the monthly payments. You can make arrangements for these new parcel owners to pay you for use of the estate, but that's between you and the other Residents. Many estate owners use the estate's covenant to explain their payment structure. Estate owners can deed out the land parcels on regions in their estate to a group. The actual ownership is not conveyed to the group (you still own the regions), and group members cannot pay for your regions by contributing land allocations. The region owner (you) are always billed the region's monthly payment, no matter how the group land is set up. Read more about estates and groups in Group-owned land. Transferring or canceling Private Region ownership You have a couple of options: You may transfer ownership of the Private Region to another Resident. This requires both you and the buyer to enter support tickets with certain details about the transaction. See Managing Private Regions for more details on the transfer process, cost, and timeframe. You may abandon your Private Region to Linden Lab. There is no fee to do so. No refunds will be given, and you will have the use of your region until the end of the current billing cycle. You need to notify the Concierge staff of your intention by submitting a ticket. Go to the Support Portal and click New Ticket Submission. In the Ticket Type dropdown, select Land and Region Issues. In the Region Request dropdown, select Region Cancellation Request. Fill out the requested details, and at the bottom, click Finish to submit the ticket. You can see billing dates and fees for all of your Private Regions at the Land Portal. If your Private Region fees are invoiced, you can see the date your billing cycle ends by logging into your Netsuite account. Note: If your next billing date falls within 5 business days of when you submit the ticket, please notify Concierge by phone or chat, so that you will not be billed automatically. Provide your ticket number in that conversation. When your ticket is processed, you'll receive a response indicating that the region will be taken offline on its next billing date and that you will not be charged any further maintenance fees. Please pick up or return any content on the region; any inventory remaining after the billing date will be deleted. Estates overview An estate is a named collection of one or more Private Regions. Estate-level controls allow you to administer and make adjustments to all regions in a given estate. Since all Private Regions must be in an estate, all Private Region owners are also estate owners by default, even if you only have one Private Region. Estate owners can: Acquire a large amount of land easily. Enjoy land ownership separate from the ever-changing Second Life mainland. Build and control their Second Life experience without adjacent neighbors. Exercise more land controls than those provided on the mainland. Name the regions they own. Estate-level tools make it convenient to manage multiple regions. If you have three regions (A, B and C) in an estate called Z, then to get to each of them you still need to teleport to those regions by name. You can however ban someone from the Z estate, which keeps that person from accessing any of Z's regions. You can also set the day/night cycle by estate so that all of your regions are in sync. Transferring or canceling an estate It is possible to transfer an estate by transferring all Private Regions in the estate to another Resident. For details on transferring Private Regions, see the Managing Private Regions. If you would like to terminate ownership of an estate without transferring it, please submit a support case of the type Land & Region > Region Cancellation Request, with all the relevant fields completed. Additional features and controls for Private Regions and Estates Estate owners possess a broad array of powers and options for maintaining their Private Regions and shaping them to fit their desired appearance. Many of these options can be found in the Second Life Viewer's Region/Estate window. For a more exhaustive list of management options such as region rollbacks, covenants, and terraforming tools, see Managing Private Regions. Private Region types Undeveloped regions are delivered completely empty of objects and ready to be built and shaped to your liking. Themed regions contain a ready-made build which has been optimized to get you started on your new land in minutes, and which can be futher modified to your liking. All themes are available as Full Regions, and most as Homestead Regions. The table below explains the different types of Private Regions available for purchase in the Second Life® virtual world. Full Regions Homestead Regions Openspace Regions Description The premier region product which offers the highest performance. Lower performance than a Full Region and intended for low-density rentals, quiet residential, or light commercial use. Available only to Residents who own at least one Full Region. Intended for very low-impact scenic use such as ocean, forest, or countryside. No longer available for sale. Size 65,536 m2 65,536 m2 65,536 m2 Setup fee US$349 Undeveloped US$629 Developed US$149 Undeveloped US$250 Developed No longer available for sale. Monthly maintenance US$229 US$109 US$60 Land capacity 20,000 5,000 1000 Max. avatars 100 20 10 Script limits N/A TBD TBD Habitation allowed? Yes Yes No Rental allowed? Yes Yes No Events & classifieds? Yes Yes No Conversion to Full Region allowed? N/A Yes Yes Purchasing from the land store Note: To purchase land from the Land Store, you must have billing information on file. Add billing information on your billing information page. Log into the Second Life Land Portal. Tip: Read the introduction explaining the difference between developed land and undeveloped land. The former is great for a quick start, while the latter is the choice if you want to create everything from scratch. Click either Buy an Undeveloped Private Region or Buy a Themed Private Region. If you don't need the amount of control and space that comes with a region, you can choose to Buy Mainland. You are presented with thumbnail images and descriptions of several appealing choices. These are all starting points for your creative vision, and you can always reshape your land later. Click Continue to proceed. Use the comparison details on the "Land Detail" page to decide whether you want a Full Region or Homestead. Click Choose under your selection to continue. Note: You can only purchase a Homestead region if you own or are also going to buy one or more full regions. EXCEPTION: Educational institutions. See Information for educators. On the "Name your land" page, type a name in the Create a Region Name field and click Check Availability. If your selected name is not taken, you can proceed. Region Coordinates are automatically filled in; these coordinates are where your Region will be physically located on the World Map. If you'd prefer to override them, click [change], then click a map square that isn't crossed out in red. You can click the arrow buttons to look at different areas on the map. You can also search for another region to be near (for example, one that a friend or colleague owns). Take a few seconds to fill out the brief survey at the bottom. Click the Add to Cart button. Once all details have been successfully verified, you can shop for more regions (same steps as above) or click Proceed to Checkout. Note: You may have up to 10 items in your cart at once. Items don't stay in your cart forever; they stay in your cart until you or someone else buys them. A region is held as yours for 30 minutes after your last activity in the Land Store. If someone else buys it (or a neighboring region) after those 30 minutes have elapsed, it will appear in your cart as unavailable. On the "Real Estate: Shopping Cart" page, click Place Order to confirm your purchase. Note: Orders totaling more than US$10,000 can't be processed through the Land Store. If you're planning on buying more than US$10,000 worth of land, consider making multiple orders. Delivery Once your region purchase is complete, you receive an email with the details. A new region is generally delivered within 15 minutes. Occasional service updates may affect that time, so see the Second Life Grid Status Reports page if it's taking longer than expected. Maturity ratings New regions are delivered with a default maturity rating of Moderate. You can customize this using the Region/Estate tools: From the Viewer menus, go to World > Place Profile > Region/Estate. Click the Region tab. From the Rating dropdown, select either or Adult. Click Apply. Note: If your region is Moderate or Adult, only Residents, including yourself, who have set their maturity preference correctly will be able to access the region. Otherwise, if they try to enter, they'll be prompted either to set their preferences or be age-verified. See Maturity ratings for more information. Guidelines for naming Private Regions Follow these guidelines when naming your Private Region (island) or estate. Private Region or estate names: Must not already be in use. Must be more than 2, but less than 26 characters (spaces count). Must contain three words or less. Must use only alphanumeric characters (no punctuation). Must not be the name of a real life city (however "New York Island" or "Los Angeles City" are fine). Cannot include SL, Linden, Linden Lab, Second Life etc in the name. Must comply with General maturity rating guidelines. Do not use the following as a Private Region name or estate name: The name of another person to the extent that it may cause deception or confusion. A name which violates any trademark right, copyright, or other proprietary right. A name which may mislead other users to believe you to be an employee of Linden Lab. A name which Linden Lab deems in its discretion to be vulgar or otherwise offensive (obscenities in any language and however spelled; language that is racist, sexist or otherwise derogatory in nature). Linden Lab reserves the right to change Private Region and estate names as we see fit. Ordering adjacent regions It is possible for two people to order adjacent Private Regions. The first person must: Order a Private Region, then log into the Second Life website and click the Land Manager tab. Click the My Regions tab. Click the estate name of the estate for which you want to allow neighbors. In the Allowed Neighbors column, click the edit link for a specific region. Type the name of the Resident you want to allow as a neighbor, then click Add. Click Close. The second person must Order a Private Region as described in Purchasing from the land store. During the ordering process, you may place your new region adjacent to the first person's region. Private Region customizations Initial customizations With your region order, you can specify the following customizations: Name: You can select a unique name when creating the region. See the Guidelines for Private Region Naming for details. Terrain shape: You can select from one of the six predesigned templates (including flat green land and open water). Estate: You can assign your region to its own estate or to an estate you already own (with other Private Regions owned by you). Your Estate tools allow you to control settings for more than one region at once. Customizations after purchase As estate owner, you have access to the Region/Estate menu (under World > Place Profile). This provides you with several other options to customize your region: Water height: You may specify the height sea level reaches on your region. Terrain textures: You can use almost any texture for terrain. You can specify low-resolution textures as well as high-resolution textures and configure the elevation range at which they shift from one to another. There's more information on terrain textures in the Estate Tools article. Fixed sun position: You can lock the sun at a specific time of day or night. Terraform: You can lower or raise your terrain 100m from the height at which it was created. This is usually sufficient for nearly any type of terrain (including very dramatic cliffs). Custom terrain files: You can save your terrain to a .RAW image file, edit it in a program such as Photoshop, and upload it back into Second Life to make wide-sweeping changes to your Region's terrain instantly. Agent limit: You may control how many avatars can visit your Regon at the same time, anywhere from one to over one hundred. Parcel activity: You can decide whether to allow renters to sell their parcels to other Residents, and whether they can subdivide the parcels they rent. Teleport routing: You can use a telehub to force Residents to land at a specific location in your region, or you can allow direct teleporting so Residents can use landmarks or the world map teleport wherever they like. Access: You can close your Private Region to everyone except your friends and colleagues, or you can open it to everyone in Second Life! You may also ban specific Residents by name if they cause trouble. Renting a region for a special event Got a plan for a large event and need a temporary place to have it? Linden Lab offers temporary Full Region rentals. Rental amounts are to be paid in full at the beginning of the rental period. Rental rate Land rental rates are different depending on whether you want to rent Private Regions or space on the mainland. Private Regions are US$50 per region per day. Mainland regions are L$4,000 per region per day. Note: You must have a premium account to rent mainland regions. You can rent a Private Region with any account type. Linden Lab does not offer discounts on region rentals at this time. Mainland rental regions are Iridium, Osmium, Palladium, Platinum, Rhodium, and Ruthenium (named after the platinum group metals.) Details Reservations must be made 2 weeks in advance and are on a first-come first-served basis. Residents must include a full description of the event when applying. Minimal rental period is 3 days. Residents are allowed to terraform the land and do not incur tier fees for temporary ownership of the land. Residents cannot transfer the land during the rental period. The original state of the regions will be saved immediately before the rental period. At the conclusion of the rental period, the regions will be restored. More information If you're interested in renting, please submit a Land and Region Issues ticket with the Region Request field set to Region Rental from our Support page. Additional information you'll need to submit includes: The number of regions you want Rental start and end dates Whether or not you need to be able to terraform the regions A full description of your event Invoicing for special orders If you are an educator, non-profits organization, Resident under 18 years old or a business entities that requires a formal invoice, then place your order for private regions with the Special Island Order Form. Use the special order form under these conditions: Orders for eligible educational institution or not-for-profit. There is no longer an educational discount, however, your status as an educator or non-profit does require verification, and there is a minimum initial purchase of five regions to qualify for invoicing. The five region minimum purchase requirement does not apply to currently-invoiced customers. For all under 18 Resident, non-Linden Home, land orders (requires parental/guardian approval if under 18). Note: users under the age of 18 cannot purchase Linden Homes. Any order requiring an invoice (payments by wire transfer, check or credit card). Specifically for business entities purchasing more than five regions (minimum requirement does not apply to currently invoiced customers) requiring a formal invoice/receipt or PO# type process. PO# not required at the time of ordering. If your purchase does not fall into these categories, then place your order at the Land Store. Note: All orders placed through the Special Island Order Form require advance payment of six or twelve months maintenance fees. Maintenance fees are added to your island order invoice based on the payment cycle chosen at a rate of $229.00. Payment is made from the invoice which is issued upon the delivery of your island. Your first invoice will include both the setup and the first cycle of maintenance. Where to get an invoice Second Life offers the invoicing option though the special orders selection in the Land Store. You can also access invoicing directly from specialorders.secondlife.com. Verification information You need to provide the following information to use the invoicing option. Please read the guidelines below carefully. If your questions are not answered by this document, please submit a Support ticket to request explanation (include "Education" in the ticket summary). Note: Second Life cannot provide invoicing option to Individuals, including educational professionals who wish to purchase a region for personal use or developers who wish to purchase a region for an institution. Approval and Private Region delivery Submitting an order does not obligate you to pay immediately; payment is made once the Private Region has been delivered and the invoice sent. When you place the order, you receive a sales order confirmation. This is merely an order confirmation, not a notice of delivery. Once you place the order, your order enters the approval queue. Once the order is approved, you receive an approval email and your order is placed in the delivery queue. After approval, delivery time under normal circumstances is 10-15 business days. You cannot make a payment until you receive an invoice, which you then have 30 days to pay. Invoices for maintenance are emailed when the payment schedule is ready for renewal. Warning: Late payment may result in the closure of your Private Region and the loss of any inventory it contains. You have access to your account in Netsuite (Second Life's special orders system) through the special ordering website. Note: Netsuite is a different website than secondlife.com. In your Netsuite account, you will be able to: View your sales order. Add your credit card information. Pay your invoice with a credit card. Payment Information You may pay via check, credit card or wire transfer. We neither accept Paypal nor use funds from your Second Life account to pay for your invoiced Private Region order. Note: Currently, VAT is not added to our invoiced orders, but we will inform you if this changes. Find out more about VAT and Second Life in Account balance. Wire Transfer See Account balance for more information on paying by wire transfer. You must pay your bank's wiring charges, which are added to your invoice total. Be sure to reference your invoice number in the wire details. Credit Card To pay by credit card: Log into your Netsuite account. You are directed to menu options. Select Make a Payment. All outstanding invoices appear. Move to the bottom of the page, where you may add your credit card information for payment of the invoices you select. Note: The list of outstanding invoices is not the sales order document. Check or Bank Draft Please submit a check or bank draft to: Linden Research Inc Dept. 34109 PO Box 39000 San Francisco CA 94111 USA Those who use Purchase Order numbers should send us the required vendor forms for completion. We will add the PO# to the invoice as soon as we receive it. Other useful information: Federal Tax ID#: 94-3364615 VAT #: EU826011179 You may choose to convert some of your Private Regions from one Private Region type to another. This article covers the different scenarios and costs associated with each possible conversion. Converting Regions For information on converting your Regions, please see our article on Converting Private Regions.
  28. 1 point
    Requirements Creating an auction Re-scheduling an auction Cancelling an auction Completing an auction In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português It is possible to create your own land auctions for individually owned parcels on the Second Life mainland. Requirements The parcel must be owned by an individual resident and the parcel must be on the mainland. Group owned parcels and parcels on private islands cannot be auctioned. Your parcel must also be marked Show in Search (see Place Pages for more information). Auctions can only be created by the parcel owner, and the owner must have a verified email address. Creating an auction Go to https://places.secondlife.com/ and click on My Places in the menu bar. Select a parcel to be auctioned and click Visit. This takes you to the Place Page for that parcel. Click the Auction This Parcel button in the left column. This takes you to the form to schedule the auction for this parcel. There are four fields, all required: Start Time: The time when the auction will begin, in Pacific Time Close Time: The time when the auction will end, in Pacific Time Starting Bid: The minimum bid required for the first bidder, in Linden dollars (L$) Bid Increment: The increment by which bids must be increased (for example, if the current bid is 500 and the bid increment is 10, then the next bid must be at least 510). Note: These fields are populated with default values, but you are free to adjust them. The following limitations apply: Start Time: Must be in the future, but cannot be scheduled more than four weeks in the future. Close Time: Must be at least 48 hours after the start time but auctions can last no more than one week. Starting Bid: The default starting bid is L$0.50 per parcel square meter, but you can change it to whatever you like. Bid Increment: The default bid increment is 10. Bid increment must be set in multiples of 10, and the maximum increment is 100. When you have set the desired values, click the Create Auction button. Your parcel then appears in the Scheduled Auctions list until the start time, and the Place Page indicates that an auction has been scheduled. After the start time, your parcel appears in the Open Auctions list and the bidding box appears on your parcel's Place Page. When you create the auction, the ownership of the parcel is transferred to a temporary holding account named AuctionServices Linden. You will no longer be listed as the owner. You will not be able to edit, cut, sell, or change the parcel in any way once you create the auction. If you cancel the auction, or if the auction completes without any bids, then the ownership of the parcel returns to you. Re-scheduling an auction At any time before the auction begins, you can change the scheduled times and bid amounts. When the auction has been scheduled but not started, a Re-Schedule This Auction button appears on the place page for the parcel owner. Clicking this button takes you back to the schedule form, where you can change any of the previously set values. Cancelling an auction You may cancel an auction at any time before it starts. You can also cancel an auction that has already begun as long as there are no bids. Simply click the Cancel This Auction button on the Place Page and then confirm cancellation on the next page. When you cancel the auction, the ownership of the parcel reverts back to you. Note: You cannot cancel an auction if it has received at least one bid. Completing an auction When the Close Time arrives, the auction is completed automatically. You receive an email notification that the auction has been completed, but no action is required on your part. Ownership of the parcel is transferred to the auction winner, and the winning bid amount (minus a 15% commission) is transferred to your account. If the auction closes without having received any bids, the ownership of the parcel is transferred back to you from Auction Services.
  29. 1 point
    What to do if you forget your password What to do if you forget your Second Life username Retrieve your name from your welcome email Retrieve your name from the Second Life website How to change your password How to change your email address What to do if your account is compromised What to do if you forget your password If you know your username but have forgotten your password, go to the password recovery page. Enter your username and click Send Instructions to have instructions on how to create a new password sent to the email address connected to the account . You'll need to answer the security question you chose when creating your Second Life account. Be sure to check your junk mail/spam folder. If you can't recall the answer to your security question or no longer have access to the e-mail account you provided, just contact Customer Support, preferably by opening a support case. You'll be asked to verify your identity and, working together, we can reset your security question. We apologize in advance that support cannot retrieve passwords. Luckily, this won't be an issue once we reset your security question. What to do if you forget your Second Life username The username you created during registration is required to login to the Second Life® virtual world. If you forget your username, you can retrieve it: From your welcome email From the Second Life website Note: If you forgot which email address you used when you registered, you can find out on the Contact Information page. You must have either your username or email address to recover your account credentials. Retrieve your name from your welcome email You provided an email address to register your account. A welcome email containing the Second Life username you created was sent to this address. To locate the email: Log into your email account and search your archives for "second life". Look for an email with your username in the subject line: "Welcome to Second Life, YOUR NAME!" Retrieve your name from the Second Life website Warning: If you registered multiple Second Life accounts with the same email address, you will be able to retrieve the username of only your first account. This is a known system limitation. Before you ever have to use this form, write down your usernames somewhere you'll remember! If you have forgotten your username or password: Click Login on the Second Life website. Click Forgot your login information? Under Forgot Your Name? enter your email address. Click Forgot Account Name. Your Second Life name will be sent to you shortly. How to change your password You can change your password, along with other account-related information, on your account page. To view your account page, log in and select Account > Account Summary from the top left side of the page. Click Account > Change Password to change your password. Your Second Life account is linked with an email address of your choosing, which is where things like announcements from Linden Lab and offline instant messages (if you have those enabled) are delivered. How to change your email address You can easily change your email address on the Second Life website: Login to your Dashboard. On the left, click Account, then click Change Email Settings. Enter a new email address after Enter your new email address. Confirm your new email address by entering it again after Confirm your new email address. Click Save Changes under Confirm your new email address. Shortly afterwards, your old email address will also receive a "Second Life Email Changed" email to confirm that the change was done by you, the actual account holder. Tip: Keep your account safe! Don't give your password out, and make sure your web browser's address bar shows secondlife.com to prevent being phished. What to do if your account is compromised Your account may have been compromised if: You can't access your account. You suddenly notice a reduced available balance on the payment source you have on file. If this happens, contact us immediately! Here's what to do: Go to the Second Life Help page and log in if you can. If you can't access your account, use the Forgot your login information? link on the right to recover your username and reset your password. Then log in. On the Second Life Help page page, click Submit a a Support Case. Under Issue Type, select Account Issue. A second dropdown appears. Under Account Issue, select Account Compromised. Fill in the rest of the fields as directed. Click Submit. Check your email for your case number. Call our fraud number: 800-860-6990. Once you do this, Linden Lab will place your account on hold and investigate the relevant transactions. This may take a few days. Once we have concluded the investigation, we'll send you an email explaining our conclusion and the action we will take. Note that all transactions involving Linden dollars are subject to Linden Lab's Terms of Service. Tip: Even if you are able to log into your account, we recommend that you change your password immediately to something secure and unique. Changing your password regularly is one good way to protect the safety of your account. For information on how to change your password, see the How to change your password section of this article.
  30. 1 point
    En otros idiomas Ventajas de una cuenta Premium Actualización a una cuenta Premium Hogares Linden Recompensas en dólares Linden Bonus al registrarte Pagas semanales en dólares Linden Pagas en cuentas antiguas Bienes virtuales Premium (regalos) Cómo obtener un bien virtual Premium Permisos de objetos en los bienes virtuales Premium Cómo obtener ayuda para un bien virtual Premium Preguntas frecuentes No recibí el bien virtual anterior, y el quiosco solo tiene el más reciente. ¿Puedo conseguir el que me falta? ¿Un quiosco puede proporcionarme varias copias de un bien? He borrado por accidente un bien virtual Premium. ¿Puedo recuperarlo? Sandboxes Premium Más ventajas Premium Chat en vivo con el personal de soporte Derecho a un terreno propio en las zonas del Continente más visitadas Acceso inmediato a zonas exclusivas de adultos Aumento de la pertenencia a grupos Acceso prioritario a regiones muy pobladas Bajar de categoría o cancelar una cuenta Premium Bajar de cuenta Premium a cuenta básica Cancelar tu cuenta Puede que te sigamos cobrando el terreno Ventajas de una cuenta Premium La cuenta Premium ofrece las siguientes ventajas: Tu propio Hogar-Linden privado Recompensas en dólares Linden Bienes virtuales exclusivos Sandboxes solo Premium Chat en vivo con el personal de soporte Derecho a ser propietario de parcelas continentales en zonas populares Acceso inmediato a zonas exclusivas de adultos Aumento de la pertenencia a grupos Acceso prioritario a regiones muy pobladas, utilizando la capacidad regional aumentada Acceso a eventos y experiencias premium Transformación de voz Aumento del límite de mensajes MI perdidos Historial de transacciones en L$ aumentado de 32 a 90 días Actualización a una cuenta Premium Para actualizar de una cuenta básica a una cuenta Premium: Inicia sesión en el sitio web de Second Life. En la parte izquierda de la página, pulsa en Cuenta Premium. La pantalla Cambiar el tipo de cuenta te mostrará un cuadro con los Tipos de cuenta y sus precios. Selecciona Premium (escoge entre Mensual, Trimestral, o Anual en las opciones de facturación). Pulsa en Guardar cambios. El nuevo tipo de cuenta se activará en la siguiente fecha de facturación. Nota: Como miembro Premium, obtendrás un bonus por única vez de L$1000, una paga semanal de $L300 y un bonus premium de 1024 metros cuadrados Solo podrás recibir el bonus de actualización de L$1000 una vez por cada cuenta. Hogares Linden Los Hogares-Linden son casas listas para instalarte integradas en un vecindario temático y son exclusivas para los titulares de cuentas Premium. Nota: Los Hogares Linden solo están disponibles para los usuarios mayores de 18 años. Si desea más información acerca de los Hogares-Linden, consulte: Descripción general de los Hogares Linden Recompensas en dólares Linden Como miembro Premium, al registrarte obtendrás un bonus y una paga semanal de Dólares Linden. Bonus al registrarte Si mantienes activa tu cuenta Premium durante 45 días consecutivos después de registrarte, depositaremos directamente en tu cuenta Second Life un bonus de 1000 L$. Pagas semanales en dólares Linden Como miembro Premium, al registrarte obtendrás una paga semanal de $L300, aunque no hayas ingresado a tu cuenta. Las pagas semanales son un proceso automatizado que se lleva a cabo los martes. Estos pagos se basan en información obtenida de la base de datos a partir del lunes anterior. Por ejemplo: Si creas la cuenta Premium el lunes 14 de abril, recibirás tu primer paga semanal el martes 15 de abril. Si creas una cuenta Premium el martes 15 de abril, recibirás tu primer paga semanal el martes 22 de abril. Nota: Las pagas semanales pueden aparecer al final del día martes o quizás recién el miércoles. Pagas en cuentas antiguas El monto de la paga en cuentas antiguas depende del tipo de cuenta que tengas y su antigüedad. Las cuentas premium creadas o actualizadas a partir de una cuenta básica: El 1 de noviembre 2006 o después, reciben L$300 por semana. Desde el 21 de julio 2006 hasta el 31 de octubre 2006, reciben L$400 por semana. Antes del 21 de julio 2006, reciben L$500 por semana. Algunas cuentas básicas antiguas obtienen una paga semanal; las cuentas básicas creadas Antes del 6 de junio 2006, reciben una paga semanal de L$50 si ingresan a la cuenta esa semana. Luego del 6 de junio 2006 no reciben una paga semanal. Bienes virtuales Premium (regalos) Al ser titular de una cuenta Premium recibirás periódicamente un bien virtual como beneficio. Los bienes virtuales Premium están diseñados por Residentes asignados por Linden Lab. Cómo obtener un bien virtual Premium Solicita tu bien virtual Premium en uno de los quioscos expendedores del mundo virtual que figuran en la Guía de destinos de Second Life: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts. Si ya ingresaste a tu cuenta a través del sitio web, accede ahttps://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/gifts. Sigue estos pasos para utilizar uno de los quioscos: Pulsa con el botón derecho en el quiosco. Elige Comprar. NOTA: No tendrás que pagar, el objeto es gratis para los usuarios con una cuenta Premium. Luego se transferirá a tu inventario. Los quioscos expendedores del mundo virtual solo brindan los bienes virtuales Premium más recientes. No puedes obtener más antiguos. Permisos de objetos en los bienes virtuales Premium Los bienes virtuales Premium son no modificables, no transferibles y copiables, esto significa que puedes realizar copias, pero no puedes modificarlos o transferirlos. Para obtener información general sobre los permisos en objetos, accede a Permisos sobre objetos. Cómo obtener ayuda para un bien virtual Premium Los bienes virtuales Premium están diseñados por Residentes y son asignados por Linden Lab. Por favor no contacte al creador para obtener ayuda. Cada bien virtual Premium viene con una tarjeta con Preguntas frecuentes para ayudarte a comenzar a utilizarlo y para responder a las preguntas más habituales. Si aún te quedan preguntas sin responder, envía un email a premium_feedback@lindenlab.com. Actualizaremos las tarjetas según sea necesario, pero no podemos brindar respuestas individuales. Preguntas frecuentes No recibí el bien virtual anterior, y el quiosco solo tiene el más reciente. ¿Puedo conseguir el que me falta? No, los quioscos expendedores del mundo virtual solo proporcionan los bienes virtuales Premium más recientes. ¿Un quiosco puede proporcionarme varias copias de un bien? ¡Sí! Al ser titular de una cuenta Premium puedes recibir todas las copias que desees de un bien virtual. He borrado por accidente un bien virtual Premium. ¿Puedo recuperarlo? Sí. Siempre y cuando el próximo bien virtual aún no se haya distribuido, puedes obtenerlo en uno de los quioscos del mundo virtual. Sandboxes Premium Una sandbox, o zona de pruebas, es un área separada para practicar la construcción. Al igual que las zonas de pruebas reales y los juegos sandbox conceptuales, en estos espacios hay creatividad y caos. Si deseas obtener más información acerca de los Hogares-Linden, consulta: Ayudas para la construcción. Existen distintas zonas de pruebas, cada cual con un propósito particular, como las Zonas de prueba de armas, pero la mayoría son simplemente para la construcción. Los signos en cada área sandbox indican claramente qué tipo de actividades se permiten realizar allí. Las zonas de pruebas en general tienen retorno automático para limpiarse a sí mismas varias veces al día; identifique la información de autolimpieza antes de construir, para no tener sorpresas. Como las sandbox son experimentales, pueden también ser inestables, asegúrate de contar con respaldos de inventario regulares para registrar aquello que sea importante. Las sandbox Premium están disponibles únicamente para los Residentes con cuentas Premium. Cada sandbox tiene cuatro regiones. En general, hay una sandbox por continente de Hogares Linden. Encuentra las sandboxes Premium en la Guía de destinos de Second Life: http://secondlife.com/destinations/premium/sandboxes. Más ventajas Premium ¡Las cuentas Premium también incluyen beneficios adicionales! Chat en vivo con el personal de soporte Los residentes con cuentas Premium pueden iniciar un chat en vivo con el personal de soporte a través del portal de soporte. Las cuentas básicas tienen acceso a este tipo de soporte. Derecho a un terreno propio en las zonas del Continente más visitadas Los residentes con una cuenta premium pueden comprar parcelas en zonas del continente y deben pagar una suma mensual cuando su terreno supera los 1024m². Para obtener más información, consulta: Cuotas por uso de terreno. El Continente es el territorio conectado más grande de Second Life, compuesto por centenares de regiones conectadas entre sí por carretera, ferrocarril y océano abierto. Solamente los titulares de cuentas Premium pueden adquirir parcelas de terreno en el Continente. Acceso inmediato a zonas exclusivas de adultos El acceso a Hogares-Linden y las zonas de adultos está reservado para los residentes de 18 o más años. Si tienes 18 años o más, cuando te registras para una cuenta Premium tendrás automáticamente acceso a estas zonas. Para obtener más información, consulta Acceso a terrenos y contenidos con calificación Adulto y Contenidos con calificación Adulto. Aumento de la pertenencia a grupos Los residentes con una cuenta Premium pueden ser miembros de hasta 60 grupos por vez. Los usuarios con cuentas básicas solo pueden ser miembros de hasta 42 grupos. Acceso prioritario a regiones muy pobladas Las regiones en Second Life tienen una capacidad bonificada para permitir que los propietarios de regiones, administradores de estado y residentes con cuentas premium puedan ingresar a una región que estaría completa. El límite predeterminado de cantidad de avatares permitidos para una región es el siguiente: Regiones completas permiten un 10% extra (100 a 110) Hogares permiten un 25% extra (20 a 25) Espacios abiertos permiten un 20% extra (10 a 12) Para más detalles sobre el acceso a la capacidad bonificada de regiones, consulte Capacidad regional aumentada y acceso en el Blog Second Life Bajar de categoría o cancelar una cuenta Premium Bajar de cuenta Premium a cuenta básica Para bajar de una cuenta Premium o Concierge a una cuenta básica, sigue estos pasos: Inicia sesión en el sitio web de Second Life. En la parte izquierda de la página, pulsa en Cuenta Premium. La pantalla Cambiar el tipo de cuenta te mostrará un cuadro con los Tipos de cuenta y sus precios. Selecciona Cuenta Básica. Pulsa en Guardar cambios. El nuevo tipo de cuenta se activará en la siguiente fecha de facturación. Atención: Si cambias a una cuenta básica, perderás todos los terrenos que te pertenecen y ya no tendrás acceso a tu paga semanal de Dólares Linden o al soporte vía chat. ¡Asegúrate de vender todos tus terrenos antes de realizar el cambio! También puedes verificar las contribuciones de terrenos en tu grupo y hacer lo necesario para que tus propiedades en el grupo se conserven bien. Nota: Si eres miembro de más de 42 grupos, no perderás ninguna membresía en ningún grupo cuando realices el cambio de cuenta. No obstante, tal vez no puedas unirte a ningún grupo nuevo con una cuenta básica hasta que la cantidad de grupos a los que perteneces sea inferior a 42. Cancelar tu cuenta Cuando cancelas tu cuenta, se desactiva y pierdes acceso a ella en tu próxima fecha de revisión de facturación. Si estás pensando en cancelar tu cuenta, considera dejarla activa con una cuenta básica, es gratis. Si en algún momento deseas regresar a Second Life, tu avatar y tu inventario te estarán esperando. Siempre podrás cancelar tu cuenta accediendo a la página Cancelar cuenta con tu usuario y contraseña Second Life. También podrás acceder a este enlace desde la sección Cuenta a la izquierda del Panel de control. Una vez que hayas accedido, busca el botón Cancelar cuenta, en la parte inferior de la página. Tu cuenta permanecerá abierta hasta la fecha de facturación, ya que los montos de mantenimiento de la cuenta se pagan por adelantado. Consejo: Si deseas conservar tu nombre, avatar e inventario en caso de un uso futuro pero no quieres pagar la cuota de reactivación, puedes cambiar a una cuenta básica en lugar de cancelar toda tu cuenta. Puede que te sigamos cobrando el terreno Si has cancelado o cambiado tu cuenta Premium, quizás debas seguir pagando las propiedades correspondientes al mes actual. Como se explica en la página Cuotas por uso y Precios de terrenos: Se te cobrará siempre por tu cuenta Premium y por la cantidad máxima de terrenos que tuviste durante el ciclo de facturación actual, ya sea si hayas cancelado tu cuenta antes del fin del mes o no. Nota: Cuando cancelas tu cuenta, permanece activa hasta el final del período de pago. Durante este tiempo aún podrás acceder a tu cuenta y utilizar Second Life. Así, si compras una membresía anual Second Life y la cancelas al día siguiente, ¡aún tendrás los beneficios de un miembro Premium durante el año siguiente!
  31. 1 point
    Em outros idiomas Requisitos do leilão Encontrando um terreno para o leilão O processo de lance Dando lance em um terreno O que acontece depois Criando seus próprios leilões A página de Leilões de terrenos agora é parte das Páginas do Local. Aqui você pode encontrar uma lista dos Leilões abertos, Agenda dos Leilões e os Leilões realizados recentemente. Você pode procurar o que desejar sem se cadastrar no Second Life. Requisitos do leilão Para participar em um leilão, você deve ser um Membro Premium (porque você precisa ser um membro premium para ser um proprietário de um Continente que foi comprado e vendido por um Leilão). Sua conta também deve ser uma conta com e-mail verificado e saldo de Dólar Linden (L$) suficiente para fazer um lance. Por favor, acesse o site da sua conta Second Life para verificar o endereço de e-mail e atualizar a sua conta para uma conta Premium. Encontrando um terreno para o leilão Você pode clicar no topo de cada coluna para ordenar por resultados do leilão , por Nome, Tamanho, Horário de Início, Horário de Término ou Lance principal. Ordenar por parâmetros desejados para ajudar a encontrar um terreno que atenda às suas necessidades. Quando encontrar um terreno do seu interesse, clique na lista para visitar Página Local do terreno. Aqui você pode acessar informações adicionais, tais como o nível de maturidade do terreno e a localização da região. É importante verificar o nível de maturidade, já que isso determina que pode ter acesso ao seu terreno e os tipos de conteúdo que podem ser alocados lá. Você também pode clicar no botão Visite este local para ir ao mundo virtual e verificá-lo. Gosta da localização? O terreno corresponde às suas necessidades? Como é a vizinhança? Assim como comprar uma propriedade no mundo real, os detalhes são importantes e podem ser a chave para a sua felicidade! O processo de lance Os lances usam um processo de lances automáticos semelhante ao usado em outros sites de leilões. Quando um leilão é criado, o vendedor define um lance mínimo, um incremento de lance (um múltiplo de L$ 10 entre L$ 10 e L$ 100) e um horário de término para o leilão. Para isso, você deve especificar o valor máximo em Dólares Linden que você quer realizar o lance. Se seu lance for maior que o lance principal atual (ou o mínimo, se ainda não houver lances), o sistema de lances automáticos adicionará o valor de incremento de lance ao lance principal atual até você ou o líder atual excederem o lance máximo; o licitante que permanece se torna o novo licitante líder nesse valor. Isso é repetido para cada novo licitante até que o leilão atinja seu horário de término - quando o atual concorrente líder vence o leilão. Antes de fazer um lance em uma terreno, você deve ter Dólares Linden (L$) suficientes em sua conta. Você pode verificar o saldo disponível da sua conta exibido como Seu saldo na seção “Faça seu Lance”. Depois de fazer um lance bem-sucedido, seu lance máximo é imediatamente retirado do seu saldo e mantido em depósito até que você ganhe o leilão ou seja superado. Se você ganhar um leilão, o terreno fará um comparativo com os seus terrenos locados e taxas de nível. Antes de realizar uma oferta, certifique-se de que está à vontade para pagar qualquer taxa mensal adicional ("camadas") que possa ser acionada. Você pode rever o seu terreno acessando Sua Conta Second Life. Você pode realizar uma oferta em um terreno que o colocaria em um nível superior. O sistema o informa se "ganhar o leilão modificaria sua exigência de nível" (observe que cada leilão avalia isso com base em seus terrenos atuais; se você estiver fazendo lances em vários leilões, os valores de terreno dos outros leilões não serão usados no leilão). Grupos não podem participar em leilões, tanto como compradores quanto como vendedores. Você deve realizar lances individuais e o proprietário do terreno será o vencedor individual. Uma vez que o leilão tenha terminado e a propriedade do terreno tenha mudado, você poderá entregá-lo a um Grupo como qualquer outra terreno, mas observe que o seu nível de obrigação pode ser afetado até mesmo pelo breve período de propriedade individual. Licitando um terreno Escolha o valor máximo de Dólares Linden (L$) que você pode fazer de lance, então, digite a sua ofertar e pressione Enviar Oferta. Uma vez que você tenha feito o seu lance, você verá uma página de confirmação: Se você não quiser fazer um lance ou se mudar de ideia, não clique no botão Enviar. Feche a janela do navegador, Volte no seu navegador, ou clique em Cancelar. Se você não concordar e quiser continuar, clique em Enviar para enviar o seu lance. Você agora pode ver a Página do Local do Leilão e o seu status de lance. Para visualizar a atividade no leilão, retorne para a página principal do leilão e clique Visualizar minha atividade ne leilão. Aqui você pode ver todos os leilões abertos dos quais você participa e todos os lances de leilões anteriores (se algumas entradas parecem estar faltando, você pode estar visualizando uma versão antiga da página; tente clicar no btãoAtualizar ou Recarregar do navegador). Depois de feito o lance, não poderá diminuir o valor. A única maneira de sair de um leilão onde você é o principal concorrente é que alguém supere você. O que acontece depois Durante o processo de lance você recebe atualizações por e-mail quando faz um lance, quando for superado, quando alguém fizer lances sem sucesso contra você e (se tiver sorte) quando ganhar. Pode haver atrasos imprevisíveis no envio de e-mails, então, você pode visitar ocasionalmente Visualizar minha atividade de lance para visualizar o status do seu leilão. Se você estiver liderando o leilão, tudo o que você precisa fazer é aguardar pelo fim do leilão. Se você tiver feito um lance máximo para vencer e ganhar o leilão por um valor menor, a diferença será reembolsada. Se você for superado, nós te enviaremos um e-mail e devolveremos os fundos caucionados ao seu saldo. Se você desejar realizar um lance maior, você pode ir até Visualizar minha atividade de licitação. Se isso realmente foi o máximo que você estava disposto a gastar, não há mais nada que você precise fazer. “Eu sou um vencedor!” Parabéns, você venceu o leilão! A propriedade da parcela é definida para você, o vencedor do leilão, dentro de uma hora após o término do leilão. Se houver algum problema com o proprietário, entre em contato com o Suporte do Second Life. Você pode usar o botão Visitar este lugar na página do seu leilão finalizado para receber a sua nova área. Criando seus próprios leilões Em breve será possível que você crie leilões para vender partes de um continente seu, contanto que a parcela seja de propriedade individual e não de um grupo. Você poderá definir os parâmetros do leilão: horários de início e término, lance mínimo e incremento de lance. Se o leilão atrair os proponentes, no horário de término o vencedor recebe o terreno automaticamente e o valor do lance vencedor menos a comissão de leilão (15%) é transferido automaticamente para o seu saldo. Para maiores informações sobre os leilões de terrenos no Second Life, acesse FAQ de Leilões.
  32. 1 point
    General tips for boosting performance The basics Optimize your preferences Don't display extraneous things Manage your antivirus software Troubleshooting tips Using the statistics bar General tips for boosting performance Tip: Maintain your computer by: Routinely removing unwanted files and programs from the system. Defragmenting your disk drive regularly. Using anti-Malware software to remove spyware, virues, and other malware. Follow the recommendations here to improve overall performance of Second Life and address many common problems. The basics Make sure your computer meets the Minimum system requirements. It's best to exceed them to prevent bottlenecks, since they are the bare minimum required to run Second Life. A slower processor, older video card, or low memory can contribute to slow frame rates. Make sure you have working drivers for your video card. Search the Second Life Community for posts on your video card. The latest driver is not always the best. Make sure your firewalls are properly configured. See Using Second Life with a firewall for more information. Check to see if your hard drive light is showing a lot of activity. If it is, your system may be running low on memory and using hard drive swap space instead, which is significantly slower. Based on statistics collected by Linden Lab: If you are using Windows 8, make sure you have upgraded to Windows 8.1. Our statistics show that Second Life crashes half as often on Windows 8.1 compared to Windows 8.0. If you are using Mac OSX, upgrade to 10.9.3. Our statistics show that 10.9.3 crashes one third less than 10.7.5. Use a 64-bit version of Windows if you can. Even though we don't offer a fully 64-bit viewer for Second Life as of July 2014, our statistics show that Second Life running on 64-bit operating systems crashes half as often as on 32-bit systems. Important: Second Life allows but does not support wireless connections. Always use a hardwired connection if possible. Optimize your display preferences Optimize your preferences to help Second Life run more efficiently. Try the following: Choose Me > Preferences Click on the Graphics tab. Move the Quality and speed slider to Low. Click the Advanced Settings button Move the settings on the Mesh detail sliders to "Mid" or "Low." Automatically playing music and media can be very demanding on some PC equipment. Use manual play instead: Choose Me > Preferences > Sound & Media Deselect Allow Media to auto-play. Review the rest of your preference settings disable any unused features: Choose Me > Preferences or press Ctrl-P). Try disabling settings such as Play typing animation, Name tags, and Arrow keys always move me. Even minor items can add up to significant improvements in performance. For more information, see Setting your preferences. Don't display extraneous things Make sure your Viewer is not displaying unnecessary information that may reduce performance: Choose World > Show> Advanced Menu. Choose Advanced > Highlighting and Visibility. Select Hide Particles. Also: Choose World > Show Disable Property Lines and Land Owners. This improves performance by eliminating gratuitous visual noise. Manage your antivirus software To prevent false cache virus alerts and improve texture cache performance, turn off virus scanning for the following directories and add them to the list of ignored (trusted) directories for Norton AntiVirus: The Second Life skins directory, C:\Program Files (x86)\SecondLifeViewer\skins. The Second Life cache directory. To determine this directory: Choose Me > Preferences. Choose the Advanced tab. Look for the Cache location setting. See also Technical overview of Second Life security. Troubleshooting tips If you followed the advice above and are still experiencing performance problems, try the following. Exit and restart Second Life. This often is enough to fix the problem. Clear the cache. The cache is where the Second Life Viewer stores data on your hard drive for later retrieval. To clear the cache: Choose Me > Preferences. Click the Advanced tab. Click Clear Cache. After you're prompted, restart the Viewer. Check the Lag Meter: Choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Lag Meter. The lag meter breaks lag down into Client, Network, and Server lag, with corresponding indicators for each lag type. Click >> to reveal descriptions and advice for solving any lag problems you are having. Try teleporting to a quieter area or one with fewer objects, to see if the situation improves. Disable antialising. Check your Ping Sim and Packet Loss values: Choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Statistics Bar to open the STATISTICS window. The ping values are the time (in milliseconds) it takes to reach the server from your computer. If this number is high, it could indicate a problem with your network or internet connection. If Packet Loss is a nonzero number, your network or ISP may be having issues. See Using the statistics bar for more information. Check to see if there is anything blocking your computer's ventilation ports, and make sure all the fans are working properly. Laptops in particular can get quite hot when placed on a flat surface, so you may want to try propping yours on a stand to increase airflow, or consider buying a cooling device like a "chill mat". Finally, if you've overclocked or made other modifications to your computer, disable them until you can attain stability. You can use tools like Prime95 to stress-test your computer independently of Second Life. Using the statistics bar The statistics bar presents a detailed list of information about the performance of your computer and Second Life. While the sheer amount of information can be confusing, knowing what to look for can tell you a lot about what's going on in Second Life. To view the Statistics Bar, choose Advanced > Performance Tools > Statistics Bar. Definitions of the various statistics can be found on the Second Life Wiki at Viewerhelp:Statistics.
  33. 1 point
    Configuring your software firewall Norton Internet Security / Norton Firewall McAfee Personal Firewall ZoneAlarm Configuring your hardware firewall Using Second Life from a closed network The Proxy Settings window HTTP proxy SOCKS 5 proxy Other HTTP traffic Caveats If you are experiencing network issues with Second Life, a firewall is often the cause. Follow the steps below to configure your software and hardware firewalls properly for Second Life. Please note that Linden Lab cannot provide support for configurations in which a firewall or internet security software is interfering with Second Life's network access. Note: Firewalls and anti-virus software frequently block Second Life's auto-update utility from installing the newest version. You can always download the latest version of Second Life at http://secondlife.com/download. Configuring your software firewall Software firewalls should list Second Life as a trusted program. We highly recommend turning on notifications for any blocked network activity. You should frequently monitor your software firewall settings, as some versions automatically update settings to provide tighter security. Consult the documentation for your software or visit the manufacturer's website for details on how to configure your internet security software. Linden Lab cannot provide support for third-party software. Don't forget the built-in Windows Firewall; certain system updates may cause the Windows Firewall to re-enable itself. You can find the Windows Firewall in the Control Panel, under Security Center. Norton Internet Security / Norton Firewall Start Norton Internet Security or Norton Personal Firewall. In the main program window, click Personal Firewall. Click Configure. The Personal Firewall configuration dialog box appears. On the Programs tab, the Manual Program Control list contains a list of programs. Click on the rule(s) for Second Life. Click Remove. Click OK to confirm the removal. Click Add and manually navigate to C:\Program Files\SecondLife\Secondlife.exe Tip: Turning off Internet Worm Protection can also help. Link to Symantec for Norton product configuration. McAfee Personal Firewall Open the Personal Firewall and navigate to Internet Applications. Click on any listing(s) for Second Life and choose Delete Application Rule on the lower right. Click on New Allowed Application underneath the program list, and navigate to C:\Program Files\SecondLife\Secondlife.exe Additional helpful settings: Turn off Smart Recommendations. Turn on Show Red and Green Alerts, or Show All Alerts. Set the Security Level to Standard or lower. ZoneAlarm In the Programs panel, remove any entry for Second Life. Scroll down to the white area at the bottom of the programs list. Right-click and highlight Add Program. Browse to C:\Program Files\SecondLife\Secondlife.exe and click Open. Additional helpful settings: Set Security for the Internet zone to Medium or lower. Open the specific ports Second Life uses (see above) under Firewall > Main > Internet Zone Custom Settings. Many ZoneAlarm products include an AntiSpyware tool that detects some programs as a Remote Access Tool. These programs are quarantined by default. To set Second Life as a trusted program: Go to AntiSpyware advanced settings and set it to not automatically treat infections. Run the AntiSpyware scan. Locate Second Life. Choose Always Ignore. You may then set AntiSpyware back to automatically treat. Configuring your hardware firewall Although the details depend on your specific firewall, follow this general procedure: Open outbound access for TCP ports - Second Life servers do not establish inbound TCP connections to client systems running the Second Life Viewer software. Instead, they use the "request / response" message pattern. Enable outbound TCP access for ports 53, 80, 443, 12043, 12046 and 21002. Open outbound "session" access for UDP ports- Although UDP is a session-less transport, many firewalls block unsolicited incoming UDP traffic to a particular port unless it has seen recent outgoing UDP traffic from that same port. Activate outbound UDP for ports 53, 3478, 3479, 5060, 5062, and 12000-29999. Monitor - The intricacies of modern firewalls make it difficult for one document to cover every network configuration. Use tools such as ntop and nprobe to monitor network flow between the Second Life Viewer and servers to identify network flows blocked by the firewall. Using Second Life from a closed network To access Second Life from inside a closed network, such as at an academic institution or corporate office, you may need to configure Second Life to route its traffic through designated proxy servers. Proxy servers allow Second Life to communicate with critical resources outside a closed network. Note: Many schools and companies maintain proxy servers specifically for this purpose. If you need to connect to Second Life through a proxy server, contact your network administrator for the addresses, port numbers, and necessary credentials to complete the instructions below. The Proxy Settings window Second Life allows you to configure two types of proxy servers in order to route three distinct types of traffic necessary for connecting to and properly experiencing Second Life. To access the Proxy Settings window: Choose Me > Preferences from the top menu bar. Click the Setup tab of the PREFERENCES window. Click the Adjust proxy settings button to open the Proxy Settings window. HTTP proxy The HTTP proxy is specifically for routing HTTP traffic meant to be viewed inworld via the Media Browser or Shared Media (and potentially "other" HTTP traffic). It is not necessary to set up this proxy in order to connect to Second Life from inside a closed network, but you will not have access to web content. If you need to set up an HTTP proxy for your normal web browser, you probably need to set up an HTTP proxy for Second Life as well. To configure an HTTP proxy for web pages in the Proxy Settings window: Check Use HTTP Proxy for Web pages Enter the HTTP proxy's network address and port number in the HTTP Proxy: and Port number: fields, respectively. SOCKS 5 proxy The SOCKS proxy is responsible for routing UDP traffic (and potentially "other" HTTP traffic) between Second Life and resources outside your closed network. If you are on a closed network, such as at a school or corporate office, you must configure a SOCKS proxy in order to connect to Second Life. To configure a SOCKS 5 proxy for UDP traffic in the Proxy Settings window: Check Use SOCKS 5 Proxy for UDP traffic Enter the SOCKS 5 proxy's network address and port number in the SOCKS 5 Proxy: and Port number: fields, respectively. If your SOCKS proxy does not require authentication, you're done! If your SOCKS proxy does require authentication, choose the Username/Password radio button under SOCKS Authentication and enter your user name and password in the marked fields. Other HTTP traffic In addition to web and UDP traffic, Second Life uses HTTP for a few other purposes, such as loading your inventory and loading textures on objects. You may choose to route this "other" HTTP traffic through either an HTTP proxy or SOCKS 5 proxy. If you have configured both types of proxies, try experimenting with each to figure out which one provides the best inventory and texture loading speeds. To select a proxy for other HTTP traffic, choose from one of the available radio buttons under Other HTTP traffic proxy in the Proxy Settings window. You cannot select a proxy you have not yet configured. Caveats Proxy servers do not currently aid the following features in getting through your network's firewall: Voice chat. You may still be able to use voice chat by forwarding the necessary ports as described above in Configuring your hardware firewall. The automatic updater. The crash logger.
  34. 1 point
    Graphics card basics Cost What to do if you're having graphics problems Tip: If you want to learn about whole systems that run Second Life well, see choosing a computer! Graphics card basics Your graphics card (also called a video card) is the hardware that creates the images shown on your monitor. This card does much of the work involved in calculating and drawing the 3D world for applications like the Second Life Viewer. As a result, your graphics card plays a crucial part in your Second Life experience. To find out what kind of graphics you have, get your system info. Important: Make sure your graphics card is Second Life capable! If your card doesn't meet our System Requirements, you may not be able to use Second Life at all. Cost While prices around the world vary, these days you can easily find a graphics card that exceeds our Recommendations — one substantially above the minimum Requirements — for US$50-100. The Buying graphics cards page contains helpful suggestions from fellow Residents about where to purchase your card. What to do if you're having graphics problems Important: Always carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions. Consult the websites below for details and support. On Windows: ATI/AMD drivers NVIDIA drivers Intel drivers Apple integrates hardware and software more closely than Windows. Problems are less likely, but there are fewer revisions and workarounds (provided through Software Update). The following procedure, called a clean install, will often fix problems related to graphics cards and drivers: Download the latest graphics driver from the chipset manufacturer (ATI, Nvidia, or Intel), not the maker of your graphics card or computer. Save the file where you can easily find it, but do not install it yet. Run Windows Update and make sure your system is fully patched. Reboot your computer and enter Safe Mode by pressing F8 at the Windows logo screen. Uninstall your old video driver. On Windows XP use Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager (steps will be different on other operating systems). Then open Display Adapters, right-click and choose Uninstall. Reboot your computer. If Windows displays a message that it found new hardware, do not let it automatically install drivers. Instead, run the installation program that you downloaded in step 1. Reboot your computer You should now have a clean version of your video driver. If this doesn't solve the problem, try searching the Issue Tracker for known issues. Note: Intel Extreme graphics are not compatible with Second Life. It may be possible for certain configurations of hardware and software to successfully run Second Life while using Intel Extreme graphics; however, these configurations are inherently unstable. Note about NVIDIA drivers NVIDIA graphics cards may cause driver-related problems. After installing the latest NVIDIA drivers, the Second Life® Viewer may crash with an error message that states: "Second Life is unable to run because your video card drivers did not install properly, are out of date, or are for unsupported hardware." This appears to be a problem with the NVIDIA drivers' initial installation: the first time the install process is run, something fails silently — a file or set of files doesn't copy properly, but the installer doesn't give you any notice that something went wrong. There is a solution: ensure that all of your applications are closed, and install the NVIDIA drivers again. For some reason, the drivers almost always install correctly the second time. If these steps do not solve your problem, please see NVIDIA's Driver Installation Hints. Note about Windows Vista Second Life requires that the Windows drivers for the system's graphics card fully support the OpenGL graphics standard. Any graphics card whose installed driver does not support OpenGL detects as a "GDI Generic" instead. This message means that Second Life has detected no hardware with OpenGL support. It's up to the graphics vendor (Nvidia or ATI) to provide drivers that support both OpenGL and your operating system. As of this writing, we have successfully run Second Life on Vista under several PCs equipped with Nvidia's Geforce graphics cards. If you receive this message under Vista, are running graphics hardware that meets our Minimum System Requirements, and can't find a driver provided by your graphics vendor that provides OpenGL support, you'll be unable to run Second Life under Windows Vista on that computer.
  35. 1 point
    Second Life Share is also available for Twitter and Flickr. Opting in to Second Life Share for Facebook Adding and removing the Facebook toolbar button Updating your Facebook status Posting a photo to Facebook Checking into a Second Life location on Facebook Visiting a Second Life location from Facebook Opting out of Second Life Share for Facebook Removing Second Life Share from Facebook Video - Introducing SLShare for Second Life Opting in to Second Life Share for Facebook The first time you use SL Share, we guide you through the process of opting in. Unless you remove or delete the SL Share app on Facebook, you will not need to opt in again: Choose Me > Post to Facebook to open the Post to Facebook window. Click the Account tab of the Post to Facebook window. Click the Connect button. Follow the steps to accept or decline the App Request. You must accept in order for Second Life to share your status updates, uploaded photos, and Second Life location with Facebook. Follow the steps to accept or decline the Permissions Dialog. This allows you to set privacy settings for SL Share. The default is set to "Friends", but it can also be set to "Only Me" or you can customize or exclude Facebook friends from seeing your posts. Adding and removing the Facebook toolbar button You can add a Facebook button to your toolbar in the Second Life Viewer, giving you easy access to the Post to Facebook window: Select Me > Toolbar buttons from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. From the Toolbar buttons window, click and drag the Facebook button to the bottom or side edge of the Second Life Viewer window. Edges where you can drop the button are highlighted in blue when you pick up the button. You can now click the Facebook button to open the Post to Facebook window. This button does the same thing as choosing Me > Post to Facebook from the top menu bar. To remove the Facebook button from your toolbar: Select Me > Toolbar buttons from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Click and drag the Facebook button from your toolbar onto the Toolbar buttons window to remove it from your toolbar. Updating your Facebook status Select Me > Post to Facebook from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Click the Status tab. Enter text in the What's on your mind box. Click the Post button to post your status on Facebook. Posting a photo to Facebook Select Me > Post to Facebook from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Click the Photo tab. Position your camera to frame the shot you want, then click the Refresh button in the Post to Facebook window. Select an image resolution from the dropdown menu. The default resolution is 800x600. Changing the resolution automatically refreshes the screenshot. Choose a photo filter from the dropdown menu (Optional). Add a comment to the photo (Optional). Check the Include location in posting box to include a SLurl to the location where the photo was taken. This box is checked by default. Click Post to post your photo to Facebook. Photo filters When uploading a photo, you may choose from several predefined filters to add fun and interesting effects to your photos in Second Life: No Filter 1970's Colors - Color correction to give a "vintage 1970" look Autocontrast - Automatic gray rebalancing from dark to bright based on the image luminosity histogram Black & White - Changes the photo to black and white Heat Wave - Adds an aged film effect and vignetting Intense - Intensifies all color saturation for a more cartoonish look Jules Verne - Changes the photo to black and white and adds video scan lines and distortion Lens Flare - Add colorize effects to simulate a film camera light leak and lens flare Miniature - Sharpen and blur regions selectively to give a "tilt shift" effect Newsprint - Use a black and white screening to simulate newspaper screening Overcast - Reduces intensity of colors Sepia - Color conversion to sepia tones and vignette for a retro look Spotlight - Burn the edges and dodge the center to focus the attention in the center of the image Toy Camera - Simulate the look and feel of a film toy camera through vignetting and edge blurring Video - Adds video scan lines for the look and feel of an old CRT screen Checking into a Second Life location on Facebook Select Me > Post to Facebook from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Click the Place tab. Enter text about the location in the text field (Optional). Check the Include overhead view of location box to show a map image of the location you are checking into. If you do not check this box, the Second Life logo is displayed instead. Click Post to check into the Second Life location. Visiting a Second Life location from Facebook When you see a photo or check-in post made by someone using Second Life Share, here is how you can visit that location: Click the wall post on Facebook (either the thumbnail or the hyperlink). The Second Life Maps page opens with more information about the region. Existing Second Life users can click Visit this location to open Second Life and teleport to the location when they log in. New Second Life users click Join now, it's free. They can then set up a new account and visit the location once they log into Second Life. Opting out of Second Life Share for Facebook If you have opted into SL Share, you can opt out and disconnect the feature using the following procedure: Select Me > Post to Facebook from the top menu bar in the Second Life Viewer. Select the Account tab from the Post to Facebook window. Click the Disconnect button. This disables the connection and deletes any related cookies. To re-enable SL Share, you will need to provide your Facebook credentials again. Removing Second Life Share from Facebook Here is how to remove the SL Share app from Facebook: Log into Facebook. Go to your App Center at: https://www.facebook.com/appcenter/my Find the Second Life app. Move your mouse over the app, then click the "X" on the upper right of the field. Click Remove. Video - Introducing SLShare for Second Life
  36. 1 point
    Basic guidelines Article scope Knowledge Base article tense Terminology Second Life-specific words Deprecated terminology Use of jargon User interface elements What to capitalize Formatting General rules Sections and headings Table of contents Lists Files, paths, URLs, code samples, and typed user input Tables Warnings, notes, tips, and other templates Cross-references and links Images Styles Tools Videos Grammar and language Thoughts on style Don't ask, tell Common grammatical errors Use American English Do not use Latin abbreviations Keystrokes Numbers Trademarks Use this style guide when writing and editing Second Life Knowledge Base articles. If you are updating content that has migrated to the Community Platform from the wiki, be sure to consult the Knowledge Base Editor's Checklist before you publish. Basic guidelines There are two basic types of Knowledge Base articles: Those that answer a specific question ("How to save textures to your hard drive") Those that give some general knowledge about a topic ("Guide to Jobs in Second Life") In either case, the first paragraph of the article should answer the question: After I read this, what should I be able to do? After I read this, what should I understand better? This can be as simple as making the first paragraph say something like "This article discusses ___." Starting articles this way enables readers to find out quickly whether the information in a particular article will be useful in their immediate situation. Article scope One problem that knowledge bases frequently run into is the proliferation of pages with closely interrelated or even duplicate subject matter, but with little connection between them. To help address this, integrate or link related articles. Linking the pages together provides readers with a clear path to follow to get more help, and editors with a better view of what they need to keep track of when editing a given subject. For example, an FAQ on estate billing should be integrated with — or at the very least, closely linked to — the main article for estate billing. Duplicate information on multiple pages increases the odds that those pages won't be updated as that information changes. This vastly reduces the usefulness of the Knowledge Base as a whole. Whenever possible, try to modularize things such that information on how to do something lives in one place only, and gets linked to by other articles. That way, you only have to update it once if it changes. Knowledge Base article tense When providing instructions, use the present tense, for example: Click IM. The IM window opens. As opposed to: Click IM. The IM window will open. Generally, prefer present tense over future tense. Thus write This article covers xyz. Rather than This article will cover xyz. Terminology Second Life-specific words Second Life has its own jargon and usage. The official Second Life glossary is Viewer 2's built-in glossary, used in the Viewer 2 help system. Refer there for information on usage, spelling, and capitalization of Second Life-specific terms. Here are some common examples: "inworld" is one word. This used to be "in-world," but it's closing up the same way "e-mail" and "web site." "rez" or "rezzed" (not ressed/rezed/res). Do not capitalize. Always capitalize "Second Life." Spell "plugin" with no hyphen. Use "log in" as a verb but "login" (as in "login field") as a noun. Use "on" not "in" when referring to land, for instance, "on a parcel," "on a Private Region," and so forth. "SLurl" instead of "SLURL," when referring to Second Life URLs (http://www.SLurl.com). This is a Linden Lab trademark. When referring to Linden Lab reflexively, use "We recommend" over "Linden Lab recommends." Better, just say "Do x to achieve y." You can also say things like "Our tests have found that x happens when you y." If you're talking about a specific Linden Lab program or service, always, always use the full name of the program. Deprecated terminology As Second Life has matured, its terminology has changed as well. Take care to use the current words for concepts and items to avoid confusion and potential legal issues. Don't write "money" when you're talking about "Linden dollars" — Linden dollars aren't money! Here are some guidelines for replacing common deprecated terms. Use: "Region" instead of "sim" or "simulator" when referring to a single region. "Sim host" instead of "sim" or "simulator" when referring to a server hosting regions. "Residents" instead of "users," "subscribers," "customers," "avatars," etc. There are cases where "avatar" is a more appropriate term to use: for instance, when discussing the actual inworld representation of a Resident that can be clicked upon or edited. In that case, use "avatar," by all means! "Estates" or "Private Regions" instead of "islands," "private islands," etc. (An estate is a group of Private Regions.) "Linden dollars" instead of "money," "dollars," "cash," "lindens," etc. "L$" instead of "$" when denoting Linden dollars. "US$" instead of "$" when denoting US dollars. "Pacific Time" (PDT or PST depending on daylight savings) instead of "Second Life Time" or "SLT." "SLurl" instead of "SLURL" when referring to Second Life URL's (http://www.SLurl.com). Avoid using the term "first life." Instead, say "outside of Second Life.” Use of jargon If you're writing Second Life documentation, you should know the difference between a prim and a Class 4 server, but do the Residents reading your article? Depending on the audience your article is geared towards, they may or may not. With this in mind, you can avoid confusion in one of the following ways: If there is an actual English word or phrase for what you're describing, use that instead. If you must use jargon, link the first occurrence of each technical term to its appropriate page, or to its entry in the glossary. "Rez" shouldn't have its own page, but a good place to point to would be a page on building terminology. Likewise, "Class 5 server" should link to the Region Sales page, if that's the most applicable. As a rule of thumb, if you're working on something involving advanced subject matter (such as a page on prim torturing), basic terms like "rez" or "IP address" might not need to be defined. If, on the other hand, you're writing an article titled "I just started. What do I do now?", then everything in it will be new to your readers. When writing for a general audience, the trick is balancing between the phrases "rez a prim" and "create a primitive, one of the simple building blocks that can be used to create everything you see in Second Life." Again, refer to the glossary for proper contextual usage. User interface elements In general, capitalize and spell user interface (UI) elements exactly as they are in the interface. This section explains the standard terms for UI elements. Menus Menus appear at the top of the Second Life window. Sometimes they also appear at the top of windows inside the Second Life window, like the Inventory window. In these cases, refer to the internal window before the name of the menu; otherwise it can be ambiguous, since there are two "File" menus available if the Inventory window is open. For example: In the Inventory window, select File > Open. Use the > mark as the separator for menu item selections. For example: Select Edit > Detach Object > Right Hand to drop the object you're holding. Windows Use this term for the windows that appear within the Second Life window, such as the Inventory window or the Search window. A window is anything that satisfies most of these conditions: It's got the _ X widget in the top right corner. It's got a title in the upper left corner. It can be moved around or resized. Notifications Use this term for the small widget that pops up in the corner whenever something happens in Second Life, like when someone or something tries to give you inventory, or if it turns out you can't sit on that thing you wanted to sit on. So you might write, for example: "A notification appears, telling you there's no room to sit there." There are multiple kinds of notifications, such as the group notification dialog and friend-status notifications, but they always pop up in a consistent place, so you can give the reader spatial references like "A notification pops up in the lower right corner, telling you your pal is online." Tabs These are the tabs inside the windows in Second Life. Refer to these as you would windows, except bold them (see the formatting section below). Buttons Use this term for the buttons that appear in the UI. For example: Click the Save button. or Click Save. Fields Most other UI elements with which you provide input to Second Life are fields. Some notes on specific fields: Use "checkbox" rather than "check box." Use "select" as a verb for checking or unchecking, to avoid the redundancy of (for example) "Check the Rotate checkbox." "Select the Rotate checkbox" feels better, because the repetition is gone. Use "dropdown" instead of "drop down." This is another case where "select" works well, as in "From the Style dropdown, select Fancy." "Radio button" is any field that presents several choices that have round circles next to them. Use "select" here too, as in "Select the More swords radio button." Any other interface item, like a text field or those number fields that are all over the Build window, can be referred to simply as "the ___ field." In a long article, you can refer to fields more directly; for example, "provide a Description" instead of "provide a value for the Description field". What to capitalize Follow standard rules for capitalization; that is, capitalize: Proper nouns The first letter of the first word in numbered or bulleted lists Also capitalize: "Second Life Viewer" and "Viewer" when referring to our client software. Second Life Linden Lab Resident or Residents, when referring to the Second Life community members. Region, when used in the phrase "Private Region," “Second Life Region,” “Homestead Region,” or “Openspace Region.” For generic unqualified use, do not capitalize. Second Life region names, for example: Ahern, Help Island, Serenity The first letter of each term that identifies the name of a key on a keyboard: Ctrl-A, Escape key, the M key, Ctrl-Shift-Q The first letter of each term that identifies a particular button or menu item within the Second Life client: Inventory, Fly, IM button, Edit menu Acronyms: SL, HTML, WWW General, Moderate, and Adult, when referring to an element in the interface or to the rating of a land or of an item in the Marketplace. Do not capitalize when referring generically to the broad concept of adult (or general or moderate) content. Hence, for example, "an Adult region" but "adult keywords" and "adult activities." In general, capitalize any interface elements (names of windows, fields, buttons, menus, and so on) exactly as they appear in the Second Life Viewer. Do not capitalize the following words or phrases: web/website (unless in the context of "World Wide Web") internet dollar (as in Linden dollar) premium account basic account Formatting General rules Bold Use bold text to refer to UI elements that the user can click on or interact with. This includes: Names of tabs Names of fields Selections you make from fields Labels of buttons Names of links Menus and menu item selections Do not use bold for window titles, however windows and tabs that appear in the Viewer in all caps should be referenced accordingly in all caps. Examples: In the Tools window, click the More button. In the Tools window, click the Object tab. Click the up arrow next to the Speak button. The NEARBY VOICE window opens. From the Building Block Type dropdown, select Cube. Select World > Force Sun > Sunset to make the sun set immediately. Italics Use italics when introducing a new term for the first time. For example: All Second Life objects are made of prims, short for primitive, a 3D shape like a cube, sphere, or cone. Otherwise, use italics sparingly, in cases of extreme emphasis (which should be quite rare). Quotation Marks To specify something that the user types, use quotation marks. This is usually only applicable to text fields, and it's probably rare that we would need to specify an exact string for someone to enter, but this might come in handy one day. For example: In the About field, type "I am the king of this land and all that I survey." Remember that commas and periods should always go inside quotation marks. The only exception is when you are instructing readers to type a specific command and wish to avoid any possible confusion. Superscript Use <sup> tags to raise text as needed. The proper abbreviation for "square meters" is a common example: WRONG: m2 RIGHT: m2 Dashes Use real em dashes to indicate a break in thought: "—", not "--" or "-". If you can't enter them on your keyboard, just copy them or use the &mdash; html entity. Do not put a space before or after an em dash. Sentence spacing Use two spaces at the end of a sentence to separate it from the next sentence. Do not format punctuation marks Do not apply formatting to punctuation. For example, do not make periods and commas bold. For example: Click OK. The period isn't bold. Sections and headings Divide articles into sections, each with its own heading representing a distinct topic. Use “Heading2” (the <h1> HTML tag) in the edit toolbar for top-level article headings. Sub-headings below that level are “Heading3,” (<h2> in HTML) and so on. Use sentence-style capitalization in headings: capitalize the first word, along with any other words, such as proper nouns, that are usually capitalized (see What to capitalize above). Do not capitalize other words that would not normally be capitalized. For example: INCORRECT: An Overview of Second Life Security CORRECT: An overview of Second Life security INCORRECT: How Do I Attach and Detach Objects From My Avatar? CORRECT: How do I attach and detach objects from my avatar? Table of contents Provide a table of contents (TOC) for articles with four or more sections. If an article feels tedious to scroll through, consider dividing it into several linked articles. Lithium does not automatically generate a TOC as the wiki does. Therefore, we use an external Perl script. Prerequisite: Download this Perl script: http://duramecho.com/ComputerPrograms/HtmlHeadingsToTableOfContents/index.html If you don't have Perl installed on your computer (i.e. "if you're on Windows"): You can get ActivePerl here. You can install with the default options. Make sure you restart your computer afterward. Procedure Copy / paste the HTML into a local file. Add <html><body> ....</body></html> Run script perl HtmlHeadingsToTableOfContents.pl <YourHtmlFile.html> 4. Copy paste results back into Lithium. 5. Add TOC table wrapper code TOC wrapper code <table id="toc" class="toc" summary="Contents"> <tbody> <tr> <td> <!-- Generated TOC here --> </td> </tr> </tbody> </table> NOTE: You may want to strip off the <html><body> ....</body></html> tags, though Lithium will probably do that for you. Lists Use numbered lists for a series of steps that must be followed in order. For example: Click the Log in button. Read the Messsage of the Day. Smile! In general, each item or instruction in a numbered list should be a complete sentence and should be punctuated accordingly — that is, with a period, an exclamation point or (in rare cases) a question mark. Use bullet points (unordered lists) for a series of brief points. If you find yourself writing bullet points with long paragraphs, consider whether a list is the best format. Files, paths, URLs, code samples, and typed user input Use the <code> tag for file names, directory paths, URLs (or portions thereof), code snippets, and other typed user input. For example: Look in C:\Program Files\Second Life\app_settings\. Edit the settings.xml file. Go to http://my.secondlife.com/ In the top box, type 512. In the Region field, type Sandbox Newcomb. Put lengthy URLs on a separate line using the <pre> tag. Tables Use tables to convey parallel information efficiently. If you find yourself using a bullet list with lots of repetition, consider converting the information to tabular form. The basic format that the Lithium toolbar inserts is fine, but you will need to edit HTML to add a heading row (<th> tags) and to make a wider table, which usually looks better than the default. Heading 1 Heading 2 Data Data Data Data The above table is created with the following HTML: <table border="0" style="width: 500px;"> <tbody> <tr> <th>Heading 1</th> <th>Heading 2</th> </tr> <tr> <td>Data</td> <td>Data</td> </tr> <tr> <td>Data</td> <td>Data</td> </tr> </tbody> </table> Warnings, notes, tips, and other templates For information that deserves special emphasis, use the following HTML templates to make the message stand out. You must edit HTML and use the following HTML snippets to do so. Warning: A strong notice of what NOT to do, and if applicable, the consequences, including something that can cause harm or damage. Important: An important notice of what NEEDS to or SHOULD be done — basically, the opposite of a warning. Tip: A helpful hint to make a process easier. Note: Additional considerations and things that are good to know. Warning Warning:Warning goes here. <div style="background-color:#ffeeee;padding:10px"> <strong>Warning:</strong> Warning goes here. </div> Caution Caution:Caution message here. <div style="background-color:#ffffdd;padding:10px"> <strong>Caution:</strong> Caution message goes here. </div> Tip Tip:Tip goes here. <div style="background-color:#ffffdd;padding:10px"> <strong>Tip:</strong> Tip goes here. </div> Note Note:Text goes here. <div style="background-color:#f5f5f5;padding:10px"> <strong>Note:</strong> Note goes here. </div> Cross-references and links Links make it easier to discover more information about a topic, and save the reader the trouble of searching. If faced with a choice whether to link to relevant details or not, you can safely err on the side of linking. Link "imperative sentences", as long as they're not extremely long, to prompt action and tell the reader what happens if they click that link: RIGHT - You can download Second Life WRONG - You can download Second Life Cite Knowledge Base articles as follows: WRONG - Read this article for information on avatar attachments. WRONG - For more information see Avatar attachments. RIGHT - For more information, see Avatar attachments. Images Use images to illustrate articles with relevant screenshots of UI and inworld content. Do not include an image just for the sake of having an image: it should provide some illustrative value. The GNOME style guide contains a good discussion of when and how to use images. Use PNG format for images. Insert images into articles at a width of 640 pixels (640px), or less if the original image dimensions are readable at smaller sizes. This tends to be a good balance between visibility and content. If an image has extreme dimensions, such as being very narrow and vertically long, consider cropping it selectively in an image editor, then re-upload. In general, don't use thumbnails. Styles As much as possible, keep English text out of images to ease localization. Of course, if a screenshot includes UI text, this won't be possible. Don't use special effects such as drop shadows, torn edges on cropped images, and the like. Such effects are a distraction. There's no need to center-align images. In edge cases, they may be desired for aesthetic purposes. It's all right to leave them default, or left-aligned. Emulate the official callouts and highlights as closely as possible. We use TechSmith's SnagIt software. Only include as much as you really need; if you're talking about the Tools window, you don't have to capture the entire Second Life window. If you're going to call out something specific, like circling a button or a menu choice, use pink, and make sure the line is thick enough to stand out without obscuring anything else excessively. Use captions with screenshots! If you're going to put a sentence next to a screenshot, it should include some useful information that's not readily apparent in the actual screenshot itself. A caption should be below the picture with no extra white space between. Use a complete sentence, and punctuate it as you would a sentence. Don't number the caption ("Figure 1" for example). Use the default skin for consistency. Assuming a customizable UI, use the default configuration when possible. Tools There are many tools for taking screenshots, and you are free to use whatever you like. Here are some suggestions: Jing is a free, easy-to-use tool that provides some rudimentary callout and highlighting tools. Capture-A-Screenshot is another very simple, free tool for screenshots. Videos You can include videos and multimedia to make articles more useful and fun. Video tutorials make it easier to understand kinetic, 3D concepts. As with images, use videos judiciously to communicate only such information as can't be readily explained in words. Avoid overkill: if one video gets your point across, leave it at that. Although Lindens can explicitly embed videos using the <embed> tag, that capability is not provided to community members, due to possible security risks. The HTML filter will prevent Residents from saving articles containing such tags, so in general, use the edit toolbar's Insert a video button, shown at right. All official Second Life videos are hosted in the Second Life YouTube channel. Look there to find the URL to insert to include a video. Include a brief text summary of the video's subject above the video in the page. Use the following settings when inserting videos: Size - Large Alignment - Inline Note: While in Edit mode, videos appear at a fraction of their actual size. Don't worry: they appear correctly once you save and publish. Grammar and language This section contains tips on grammar, style, and usage. Thoughts on style "The best way to be boring is to leave nothing out" -Voltaire Edit articles consistently with their original "vibe" as established by employees of Linden Lab. Some topics will obviously be more jovial than others. Language (English and international equivalents) should be terse enough to communicate succinctly, but not so dry that it's boring. Humor can be useful to get the point across, but clarity is the first priority. Overall, the Knowledge Base's tone is more formal than that of casual venues like the Second Life Blogs. When in doubt, consult existing articles or get advice! Don't ask, tell Avoid writing headings that put their subject in the form of a question; use simple declarative phrases instead. For example, rather than "How do I make a gesture?", write "How to make a gesture." This is a clearer, more straightforward way of presenting information. Use the serial comma Per Strunk and White, in a series of three or more terms with a single conjunction, use a comma after each term except the last. Thus write, ...red, white, and blue. ...honest, energetic, but headstrong. Common grammatical errors Semicolons are used to separate two clauses of a compound sentence while indicating a closer relationship between them than a period would. We can think of semicolons as somewhere between a comma and a period. Avoid using a comma where a semicolon would be more appropriate. If you're unsure, ask someone. For a more detailed explanation of semicolons, see UW-Madison's Writer's Handbook entry on semicolon usage. Note: Short, concise sentences are always better than long and complicated ones. Use American English All Second Life English-language documentation is standardized on American English. This means (for example): Use "color" instead of "colour". Use "recognize" instead of "recognise". Write acronyms in all-caps without periods, except when they're a brand. (DOS, TCP/IP, NASA, WiFi, D.A.R.E. — these are all correct.) Do not use Latin abbreviations Latin abbreviations such as "e.g." may not be universally understood and can make translation difficult. Follow the guidelines below: Instead of Use i.e. that is e.g. for example etc. and so on Keystrokes Represent shortcuts as they're shown in the Viewer menus. RIGHT: Ctrl + Shift + W WRONG: Ctrl-Shift-W Numbers Spell out numbers zero through ten. Use numerals for 11 or larger. Trademarks The first instance of Second Life® in an article should have registered trademark after it to assert our brand. Our trademarks should always be respected. For more information, see Guidelines for Using Linden Lab's Trademarks.
  37. 1 point
    Overview Obtaining grandfathered pricing Region transfers Limited-time "buy down" event How to participate in the buy down event Overview Some older Regions have "grandfathered" or discounted pricing on their monthly maintenance fees. In 2010, we raised the maintenance fees of private Regions to match the increased costs of newer and more powerful server hardware to run new Regions, but allowed existing Region owners to continue paying the original lower monthly rate. While grandfathered pricing was originally a bonus for existing Region owners in 2010, there are options available for those who wish to obtain a grandfathered Region by other means. Obtaining grandfathered pricing Many grandfathered Regions were obtained before February 2010 and have simply retained their original pricing. However, there are ways to obtain a Region with grandfathered pricing, such as a Region transfer or special promotional offer. Region transfers As of November, 2015, you may transfer grandfathered-priced Regions in accordance with the transfer pricing schedule. We are unable to swap the price of a current grandfathered Region with a non-grandfathered Region. Grandfathered pricing stays with the Region for the life of the Region or until it is transferred or converted. If a grandfathered Region is abandoned and subsequently reactivated, its maintenance fee is updated to the current monthly rate for its Region type. Limited-time "buy down" event For a limited time in 2016, we offered a chance to "buy down" the maintenance fees on your existing Regions. By paying a one-time fee, you could take advantage of grandfathered maintenance rates for the lifetime of your Region. The pricing for this offer was as follows: For a full Region: One-time buy-down fee: $600 Grandfathered monthly maintenance fee: $195 each month (regularly $295 each month) On May 29, 2019, the maintenance fee was announced to be lowered to $179 each month (in accordance with a decrease in maintenance fees across several full private region offerings). For a Homestead Region: One-time buy-down fee: $180 Grandfathered maintenance fee: $95 each month (regularly $125 each month) If you plan to keep your Regions for longer than six months, this offer is a great deal! Note: This offer cannot be combined with our Education and Non-Profit discount program, and cannot be applied to Skill Gaming Regions. How to participate in the buy down event This offer has ended as of 11:59PM PDT on October 4, 2016.
  38. 1 point
    How to sell an object Should you sell Original, Copy, or Contents? How to set permissions on an object Bulk-setting permissions Setting default permissions when uploading Setting bulk permissions in an object's contents Advertising rules and etiquette How to sell an object Follow these steps to put an object up for sale: Right-click the object and choose Edit. Click on the General tab. If you don't see it, click More. Select the For Sale checkbox. In the dropdown menu next to the For Sale checkbox, select how you want to sell the object. • Original: Sell that exact object. When a Resident buys the object, it will stay right where it is and change owners. • Copy: Sell a copy of the object. The object will remain where it is, and the purchaser will receive a copy of the object. • Contents: Sell the objects, clothing, etc. in the Contents folder of the object. The purchaser will receive a folder (with the same name as the object) containing a copy of the object's contents (or the contents themselves if they are no-copy). Enter the price of the item in the the Price: L$box just below the For Sale dropdown menu. If you want the item to be searchable on the Second Life Marketplace, select the Show in search checkbox. Read more about selling in the Marketplace. Tip: The best way to sell clothing, animations, or multiple related items is to place them in an object and sell its contents. This works beautifully for complete outfits and costumes! Should you sell Original, Copy, or Contents? Should you sell your inworld Second Life creations as Original, Copy, or Contents? That depends on how the object is presented and what you intend to do with it. See Object sale types for full details. How to set permissions on an object Permissions on an object determine what other people can do with it. To set permissions: If the the object is inworld (rezzed), right-click it and choose Edit, then navigate to the General tab. If the object is in your inventory, right-click it and choose Properties. The entries you want to change are listed under Next owner: Modify: Permits the next owner to modify your creation. Copy: Permits the next owner to copy your creation, retaining a copy in inventory when the object is dragged inworld. Transfer: Permits the next owner to give your creation to someone else. If the object also permits copying, the copies can be sold. If the object does not permit copying, only the original object can be sold. Unchecking this means the next owner cannot give the object to anyone else. Important: Permission settings set while an object is in your inventory are not cross-checked with Contents until rezzed. When transferring an item to another Resident, be sure to rez and retake it first to ensure that its permissions are set correctly. You cannot regain permissions for an object you have given to someone else. Linden Lab is unable to reset permissions on an object. If permissions allow, it is a good idea to create a backup copy of an object before you give it to someone else. This way, you always have a copy of the "most permissive" version of the object! Important: Default permissions are no modify and no copy! Always check permissions before giving objects to others. Bulk-setting permissions The Second Life Viewer includes some features for bulk-setting permissions. That means you can apply permissions across multiple items instead of one at a time. Setting default permissions when uploading To bulk-set permissions when you're uploading images (textures), sounds, or animations: Go to Build > Options > Set Default Permissions. A window appears allowing you to specify Next owner permissions. Choose to allow others to Modify and/or Copy and/or Resell/Give away the objects. (Note that your default permissions also apply to single uploaded items.) Select Build > Upload > Bulk (L$10 per file). Select multiple files by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key, then confirm upload. After the uploads are complete, open your inventory. You can right-click each item and choose Properties to verify permissions have been set correctly. Setting bulk permissions in an object's contents Bulk-setting permissions for items in an object's contents allows you to set permissions by item type (body parts, clothing, etcetera): Right-click an object with contents you want to change and select Edit. Click the Content tab. Click Permissions button. Check or uncheck content (item) types whose permissions you want to change. Under Next owner, choose to enable or disable Modify, Copy and Transfer permissions. When you're satisfied with your settings, click OK. Tip: If you forget to apply permissions when uploading, rez a cube and drag the item(s) from inventory into the cube's contents, where you can set permissions as desired. Advertising rules and etiquette Advertisers must always take care to respect the rights and privacy of other Residents. Here are a few guidelines. Adhere to the Community Standards. Adhere to the Second Life Terms of Service. If you violate any of these rules, your account may be suspended or terminated. Post in the appropriate channels. You might try posting in the designated Classifieds section for a small fee. Many Resident-run forums and publications also welcome advertisers, but make sure to read their advertising rules and policies before you start posting. Keep it legal. You are legally responsible for your own actions in Second Life, for example, the rules for ad farms and network advertisers. Also, Linden Lab will remove without refund any classified ads, event listings, or land descriptions that advertise gambling. Read Selling in the Marketplace to learn more.
  39. 1 point
    How to browse and search classifieds How to place a classified ad Confirming your classified ad How to view and edit your classified ad Viewing classified ad statistics How to find out what a classified ad cost The in-Viewer classifieds system allows content creators to advertise products and services to fellow Residents. You can gain additional exposure and sales by advertising effectively. How to browse and search classifieds To search and browse classified ads, either click in the Second Life Viewer toolbar or go to the Second Life Search website. Then follow these steps: In the search field, enter terms describing what you are looking for, such as jewelry or skins and click Search. A list of items matching your search terms appears. Click on any classified to learn more. Click Teleport to go to the location the classified is advertising (commonly a store), or click Map to show where it is on the World Map. To search only classified ads: In the Second Life Search window, click the dropdown next to the search input box and change it to Classifieds. In the search box, enter a query and press Enter (or the Search button). This searches only classifieds. To browse classifieds by category, such as Employment or Property rental,select the desired category from the dropdown menu at the left of the Search window. To browse the classifieds, select All Categories from the Category dropdown. Tip: To get the most targeted results, enter search terms in the Search field and refine your search by selecting a specific category from the Classifieds Category dropdown. How to place a classified ad Classified ads are sorted by price or by relevance, depending on where they are displayed in search. The highest-paid classifieds appear on top when searching in Everything, and the most relevant classifieds appear at the top when searching in the Classifieds section. To create a classified: Position your avatar in the location where you want the link in the ad to teleport people to. For example, at the entrance of your store. Choose Me > Picks... In the bottom left, click the + icon and choose New Classified. The Edit Classified window opens. Fill out the fields as described below. You can edit everything about your classified, except the price, at any time. When you've filled out the fields as desired, click Publish. The Publishing Classified window opens. Enter the price you want to pay in Linden Dollars (L$). Higher prices are ranked higher in search (but the price paid for each classified isn't publicly shown). If you checked Auto renew each week, this is also the price you're charged each week for your classified, so make sure you have enough in your total L$ balance. Click Publish to publish your classified ad. The sidebar refreshes with a notification of what you paid, and shows your new classified under the Classifieds section of your profile. Important: To change the price of a classified ad, you must create a new classified and copy information from the original ad into the new one. Then, let the old classified expire by itself, or if you're sure, delete it manually. If you delete a classified early, you won't receive a refund for any remaining time left on your classified listing. If you want to stop paying for a recurring classified, make sure the Auto renew each week checkbox is unchecked. Classified ad fields: Picture - By default this will have a picture of the parcel where your avatar is standing (from World > About Land). To change it, click the picture, choose a texture (image) from your inventory, and click OK. You can upload a new picture from your hard drive by using Build menu > Upload > Image (L$10). Title: By default, the parcel's name. If you are advertising a specific product rather than a location, you can change the title text appropriately. Description: By default, the parcel's description. You can change the text in the field if you wish. The maximum length is 256 characters. Unless you're paying very highly in a broad category like "hair" or "shoes", it is generally more useful to use keywords specific your product niche. Use relevant keywords, but don't spamdex or your listing may be removed. Keywords are "stemmed", meaning that you don't have to enter every variation. For example, a search for "dance" also searches for "dances", "danced", and "dancing". Entering a hyperlink automatically makes it clickable. Location: This shows the exact coordinates at which your avatar is positioned. You can always change this by moving your avatar somewhere else and clicking Set to Current Location. Category Select a specific category. By default, the Classifieds tab in Search window shows all categories, but you can use a dropdown to narrow it down to one of the selections shown here. Content type: Classified ad content is filtered by maturity, which includes keywords consistent with search in general. Choose an appropriate maturity rating, or your classified might be removed without warning. By default, the maturity rating will be Moderate or General, depending on the rating of the region in which you create the classified. Note: If you're in an Adult region, the classified shows Moderate. This is a known issue Auto renew each week - Check this box if you want this classified to run automatically and continuously without your intervention. Each week you'll be charged the price you choose for your classified after you Publish it. Confirming your classified ad Follow the instructions in How to browse and search classifieds to find your classified the same way potential customers will: by searching for keywords. If you can't find it at first, try using keywords that are more unique to your listing. Tip: Allow at least an hour for a classified to appear and update in search. How to view and edit your classified ad After placing a classified ad, you can edit everything except the Price for listing. Follow these steps: Select Me > Picks... Click a classified, then click Info at the bottom. Notice that Clicks stats are also shown. If you want to edit, click Edit at the bottom. You can edit all of the details you entered when you first placed the classified. When you're done editing, click Save at the bottom. Viewing classified ad statistics Use classified ad statistics ("stats") to see how much attention an ad is getting. To see your stats, view one of your own classifieds as described above. You'll see Clicks: with stats next to it: Teleport - Number of times people have clicked the Teleport button when viewing your classified shown in both the Search window and the extended Classified Info. Map - Number of times people have clicked the Map button when viewing your classified, shown in the extended Classified Info. Profile - Number of times people have clicked the Profile button in Find to show your classified ad. Only you, as the classified creator, can see these. How to find out how much a classified ad cost As an advertiser, you may want to find out how much competitors are paying for their classified ads. To do so: Search for classifieds as described above Click a classified ad to expand it, Click the More Info button to view the full add. The Price for listing field shows the price paid for the advertisement.
  40. 1 point
    table { border-collapse: collapse; width: 100%; } th, td { text-align: left; padding: 8px; } tr:nth-child(even) {background-color: #f2f2f2;} Update: As of June 6, 2016, Turkish Second Life Residents are unable to use PayPal to process credit on their US dollar balances. It is, however, still possible for Turkish Residents to make purchases or to process credit using Skrill. For more information about PayPal's suspension of operations in Turkey, please visit PayPal's website (in Turkish). This article lists payment options available to Residents from the 50 most active countries in Second Life. If your country is not listed here, you can always use a credit card or check PayPal's website and Skrill's website for information about the countries they service. See our article about Billing for additional information about payments and billing for Second Life. Country PayPal Skrill Credit Card Argentina Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Australia Yes POLi paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Austria Yes EPS/Netpay Payolution Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Belgium Yes SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Brazil Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Canada Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Chile Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron China Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Colombia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Croatia Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Czech Republic Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Denmark Yes Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ecuador Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Egypt Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Finland Yes Paytrail Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron France Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Germany Yes ELV Giropay Payolution Skrill Direct SOFORT Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Greece Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Hungary Yes Skrill Direct paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron India Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Indonesia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ireland Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Israel Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Italy Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Japan Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Korea South Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Malaysia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Mexico Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Netherlands Yes iDEAL SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron New Zealand Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Norway Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Peru Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Philippines Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Poland Yes Przelewy24 SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Portugal Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Puerto Rico Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard JCB Diners Club Discover Romania Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Russia Yes Yandex Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Saudi Arabia Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Singapore Yes eNETS Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron South Africa Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Spain Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Sweden Yes Trustly paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Switzerland Yes Payolution SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Turkey Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Ukraine Yes Yandex Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron United Kingdom Yes Skrill Direct SOFORT paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron United States Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard JCB Diners Club Discover Uruguay Yes paysafecard (find local retailers here) Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron Venezuela Yes Visa American Express MasterCard Delta Online JCB Diners Club Visa Electron
  41. 1 point
    Account types Basic Premium Concierge Inactive or canceled accounts Canceling an account Re-activating a canceled account Scripted agent status In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Русский This article describes the three different types of Second Life accounts. Manage your Second Life account on the web at https://secondlife.com/my/account/. Account types There are three types of Second Life accounts: basic, premium, and Concierge. Basic A basic account is completely free. With a basic account you can: Own estates or Private Regions. Rent land anywhere, depending on the landowner's renting preferences. Have a covenant agreement on Private Regions or estates owned by other Residents. Submit support cases for a limited set of problems. However, with a basic account you cannot: Own land on the mainland. Access live chat customer support. One person can have multiple free basic accounts, subject to the alt account policy. Premium A premium account requires a monthly fee. With a premium membership you can: Own land on the mainland, including a Linden Home. Get free exclusive virtual goods Have access to premium sandboxes Submit support cases for an expanded set of problems. Initiate live chat sessions with customer support. Get a weekly stipend of Linden dollars. For more information, see Linden dollars (Getting your premium account stipend). For more information, see Premium membership. Signup bonus When you register a premium account, you receive a one-time signup bonus of L$1000 in approximately 45 days. Concierge Any account that owns an estate, pays for an estate, or pays tier for more than half a region's worth of mainland parcels qualifies for Concierge status. With a Concierge account, you also have access to a special live chat area and phone number through the support portal. It is possible to have a basic account and still qualify for Concierge service. Basic account holders can own estates and Private Regions, the setup and monthly costs for which are billed separately from land on the mainland (which can be owned only by premium account holders). A basic account that satisfies the requirements for Concierge service described above qualifies as a Concierge-level Resident. Scripted agent status If you own a Second Life account that is primarily operated by a scripted agent, or "bot", you must identify it as a bot by setting its status on your Second Life Account page. By identifying bots, you help us provide you with more accurate account statistics and inworld search results. For more information about bots and scripted agent status, see: Scripted Agent Status section of your account page on the Second Life website. Bot policy. Inactive or canceled accounts As long as you're in good standing with Linden Lab (not delinquent with billing or otherwise in violation of the Community Standards and Terms of Service) your Second Life account can remain inactive indefinitely. This means that your avatar and inventory will continue to be stored on the Second Life servers. Canceling an account If you're thinking about canceling your premium account, consider leaving it active with a basic membership, which costs nothing to maintain. If at some point in the future you should choose to revisit Second Life, your avatar and your inventory will be here waiting for you. If you do decide to cancel your account: Log in to the Second Life website with your Second Life username and password. Go to the Cancel Account page. Click the Cancel Account button at the bottom of the page. Your account will remain open until your billing review date, as account maintenance fees are paid in advance. Re-activating a canceled account If you have canceled your account, you may be able to restore it, depending on how long ago it was cancelled. There is a US$9.95 reactivation fee for restoring an account. Warning: Even if your account is restored, the associated inventory, land, and Linden dollar balance may be unrecoverable. To start the process: Open a support case. Under Issue Type choose Account Issue. Under Account Issue, choose Reactivate Account. Enter the required information Click Submit.
  42. 1 point
    In anderen Sprachen Kleidung und Körperteile aus Ihrem Inventar tragen Mehrere Kleidungsebenen tragen Kleidung und Körperteile bearbeiten Steuerung der Avatar-Physik Einstellen der Körperphysik des Avatars Verbergen oder Abschalten der physikalischen Körperbewegungen des Avatars Häufig gestellte Fragen Können andere Menschen meine Körperteile schwingen lassen? Wie kann ich sicherstellen, dass die erweiterte Avatar-Physik meinen Computer nicht verlangsamt? Ich kann meinen Avatar nicht so aussehen lassen, wie ich möchte. Gibt es empfohlene Einstellungen? Warum bewegen sich meine Anhänge nicht gemeinsam mit meinen Brüsten, meinem Bauch oder meinem Po? Sie können fast jeden Aspekt des Erscheinungsbild Ihres Avatars auf kreative Weise anpassen und eine nahezu unbegrenzte Anzahl an Stilen und Formen erzeugen. Kleidung und Körperteile aus Ihrem Inventar tragen Die einfachste Möglichkeit, das Aussehen Ihres Avatars zu verändern, ist das Tragen eines neuen Kleidungsstücks oder Körperteils aus Ihrem Inventar. Klicken Sie auf der linken Seite des Viewer-Fensters auf die Schaltfläche Aussehen . Das Fenster AUSSEHEN wird geöffnet. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte KLEIDUNG, um Ihr aktuelles Outfit anzuzeigen. Klicken Sie im oberen Fensterbereich auf die Schaltfläche Bearbeitungswerkzeug , um in den Bearbeitungsmodus für das Aussehen zu gelangen. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Mehr hinzufügen..., um eine Liste der verfügbaren Kleidung in Ihrem Inventar zu öffnen. Sie können das Dropdown-Menü Kleidung verwenden, um nach dem Kleidungstyp zu filtern, oder mithilfe der Schaltfläche Suchen nach dem Kleidungsnamen filtern. Wählen Sie ein Kleidungsstück aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Objekt anziehen, um es Ihrem Avatar hinzuzufügen. Hierdurch wird jegliche bereits vorhandene Kleidung des gleichen Typs ersetzt. Tipp: Eine schnelle Möglichkeit, alle momentan getragenen Objekte anzuzeigen, ist das Durchsuchen Ihres Inventars nach dem Suchbegriff "(GETRAGEN". (Die offene Klammer ist wichtig, da verschiedene Objekte an unterschiedlichen Orten angehängt sind, die hierdurch vollständig in die Suche eingeschlossen werden.) Sie können ebenfalls einen Rechtsklick auf Ihren Avatar ausführen und Mein Outfit bearbeiten auswählen, um die von Ihnen getragenen Objekte nach Kategorien anzuzeigen: Kleidung, Anhänge und Körperteile. Um ein Kleidungsstück oder einen Anhang zu entfernen, wählen Sie das jeweilige Objekt im Outfit-Editor aus und klicken Sie auf das Symbol Schließen , das neben ihm erscheint. In gleicher Weise können Sie die Körperteile (Augen, Haare, Form und Haut) oder Anhänge Ihres Avatars ändern. Erweitern Sie einfach die Liste Anhänge oder Körperteile anstelle der Liste Kleidung. Hinweis: Manche Körperteile, wie die Form Ihres Avatars, können niemals entfernt, jedoch ersetzt werden. Mehrere Kleidungsebenen tragen Es ist möglich, mehrere Ebenen des gleichen Kleidungstyps gleichzeitig zu tragen, beispielsweise drei verschiedene Shirts oder zwei Paar Handschuhe. Um eine neue Ebene über Ihrem bereits vorhandenen Kleidungsstück zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf Mehr hinzufügen..., klicken Sie anschließend mit der rechten Maustaste auf das neue Kleidungsstück und wählen Sie Objekt anziehen. Das neue Kleidungsstück überlagert dann die bestehende Kleidung, ohne sie zu ersetzen. Informationen darüber, wie Sie mehrere Anhänge an derselben Anhangposition tragen, finden Sie unter Avatar-Anhänge. Kleidung und Körperteile bearbeiten Sie können jegliche gegenwärtig getragene Kleidung oder Körperteile Ihres Avatars bearbeiten, sofern Sie über die erforderlichen Berechtigungen für das ausgewählte Objekt verfügen. Um ein Kleidungsstück oder einen Körperteil zu bearbeiten: Klicken Sie auf der linken Seite des Viewer-Fensters auf die Schaltfläche Aussehen . Das Fenster AUSSEHEN wird geöffnet. Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte KLEIDUNG, um Ihr aktuell getragenes Outfit anzuzeigen. Klicken Sie im oberen Fensterbereich auf das Bearbeitungswerkzeug , um in den Bearbeitungsmodus für das Aussehen zu gelangen. Wählen Sie ein Kleidungsstück oder einen Ihrer Körperteile und klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Bearbeitungswerkzeug , um mit der Bearbeitung dieses Objekts zu beginnen. Verwenden Sie die Schieberegler, um die physikalischen Parameter des Objekts nach Ihren Wünschen anzupassen. Wenn verfügbar, wählen Sie eine Textur für den Stoff aus Ihrem Inventar oder eine/n Farbe/Ton aus der verfügbaren Farbpalette. Wenn Sie die Form Ihres Avatars bearbeiten (unter Körperteile aufgeführt), können Sie dessen Geschlecht mithilfe der Optionsschaltflächen im oberen Fensterbereich auswählen. Tipp: Mit dem Editor für das Aussehen können lediglich Kleidung und Körperteile bearbeitet werden. Um Anhänge zur bearbeiten, müssen Sie die Bauwerkzeuge verwenden. Sie können auch Ihre eigene Originalkleidung erstellen. Steuerung der Avatar-Physik Stellen Sie die Eigenschaften der Körperphysik ein, um anzupassen, wie die die Brüste, der Bauch und der Po Ihres Avatars reagieren, wenn er sich bewegt. Sie können diesen Effekt dezent und realistisch oder wild und verrückt gestalten - wie auch immer Sie es wünschen. Diese Funktion wird gelegentlich als erweiterte Avatar-Physik bezeichnet. Im folgenden Video werden identische Avatare gezeigt, welche die erweiterte Avatar-Physik in unterschiedlichen Stufen nutzen - niedrig/mittel (links), hoch (mittel) und aus (rechts): Wenn Sie diese Funktion für Ihren Avatar nicht wünschen, brauchen Sie nichts zu unternehmen, sondern können Ihren Avatar einfach unverändert lassen. Ihr Avatar bewegt sich nicht anders, so lange Sie kein tragbares Objekt mit physikalischen Eigenschaften verwenden, wie nachstehend beschrieben. jmAq4PxfSYU Einstellen der Körperphysik des Avatars So fügen Sie die erweiterte Avatar-Physik hinzu: Öffnen Sie in der Seitenleiste die Registerkarte Mein Aussehen. Klicken Sie im unteren Bereich auf das Kleidungssymbol . Wählen Sie Neue Kleider > Neue Physik. Klicken Sie auf den Körperteil-Parameter, den Sie ändern möchten. Hinweis: Wenn Ihr Avatar männlich ist, können Sie lediglich die Eigenschaften für den Bauch und den Po ändern. Verwenden Sie die Schieberegler, um die Parameter für den Körperteil zu ändern. Tipp: Klicken Sie oben rechts auf das ?, um mehr über die Funktionen der einzelnen Schieberegler zu erfahren. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 und 5 für jeden Körperteil-Parameter, den Sie ändern möchten. Geben Sie im oberen Bereich einen Namen für diese Kombination aus physikalischen Parametern ein. Klicken Sie im oberen Bereich auf die Schaltfläche Speichern, wenn Sie alle Einstellungen abgeschlossen haben. Sie tragen nun ein Objekt mit erweiterter Avatar-Physik. Wenn Sie springen, kauern, tanzen oder laufen, bewegen siech die Brüste, der Bauch und der Po Ihres Avatars so, wie Sie es festgelegt haben. Tipp: Wenn Sie einen Tanz beginnen, bevor Sie Ihr Physik erstellen oder bearbeiten, setzt Ihr Avatar den Tanz fort, während Sie die Einstellungen vornehmen und Sie können die Auswirkungen Ihrer Änderungen verfolgen. Sie können Physik-Objekte anziehen, ausziehen und bearbeiten wie jedes andere Kleidungsobjekt, allerdings können Sie nicht mehr als ein Physik-Objekt gleichzeitig tragen. Mehr über die Verwendung von Kleidungsobjekten erfahren Sie unter Ihr Aussehen bearbeiten. Verbergen oder Abschalten der physikalischen Körperbewegungen des Avatars Wenn Sie keine physikalischen Körperbewegungen von Avataren, inklusive Ihres eigenen, wünschen, können Sie diese in Ihrem Viewer deaktivieren: Öffnen Sie die Registerkarte Ich > Einstellungen > Grafik. Klicken Sie auf Erweitert. Setzen Sie den Schieberegler für die Avatar-Physik auf die niedrigste Einstellung. Dies bewirkt lediglich, dass Ihr Viewer keine Körperphysik-Bewegungen der Avatare anzeigt. Wenn Sie die Avatar-Physik in Ihrem Viewer deaktivieren, Ihr Avatar jedoch ein Physik-Objekt verwendet, können wird anderen Nutzern weiterhin dessen Körperphysik angezeigt. Wenn Sie nicht möchten, dass andere Nutzer Ihre Körperphysik angezeigt wird: Tragen Sie kein Physik-Objekt oder Tragen Sie ein Physik-Objekt und setzen alle Schieberegler-Einstellung für den Max. Effekt auf 0. Häufig gestellte Fragen Können andere Menschen meine Körperteile schwingen lassen? Nein, selbstverständlich nicht. Dies ist einer der größten Vorteile dieser Funktion: Sie können vollständig selbst steuern, wie Sie für andere Nutzer aussehen. Wenn Sie nicht möchten, dass Ihre Körperteile schwingen, brauchen Sie nichts weiter zu tun, als die Funktion auszuschalten. So lange Sie kein Physik-Objekt tragen, sehen Sie aus wie gewohnt. Wie kann ich sicherstellen, dass die erweiterte Avatar-Physik meinen Computer nicht verlangsamt? Wenn Sie denken, dass Ihre erweiterte Avatar-Physik Verzögerungen verursacht, können Sie die Aktualisierungsrate für die Avatar-Physik einstellen: Öffnen Sie die Registerkarte Ich > Einstellungen > Grafik. Klicken Sie auf Erweitert. Setzen Sie den Schieberegler für die Avatar-Physik auf die gewünschte Einstellung. Eine niedrigere Einstellung senkt die Aktualisierungsrate, so dass die Avatar-Physik ruckelnder dargestellt wird. Eine höhere Einstellung bewirkt reibungslosere Bewegungen, kann jedoch die Leistung beeinträchtigen. In der niedrigsten Einstellung ist die erweiterte Avatar-Physik ausgeschaltet. Ich kann meinen Avatar nicht so aussehen lassen, wie ich möchte. Gibt es empfohlene Einstellungen? Wir können Ihnen keine Einstellungen empfehlen, da die Avatar-Physik ausschließlich für das benutzerspezifische Erscheinungsbild gedacht ist, das Sie persönlich wünschen. Da es sich bei der erweiterten Avatar-Physik jedoch um ein tragbares Objekt handelt, besteht für Kleidungs-Designer die Möglichkeit, Kleidung mit benutzerspezifischen physikalischen Einstellungen und Eigenschaften zu erstellen. Besuchen Sie den Marktplatz, um nach Kleidung mit erweiterter Avatar-Physik zu suchen. Warum bewegen sich meine Anhänge nicht gemeinsam mit meinen Brüsten, meinem Bauch oder meinem Po? Hierbei handelt es sich um eine technische Einschränkung. Momentan besteht keine Möglichkeit, eine Anhangposition zu erstellen, die sich gemeinsam mit Ihren Brüsten, Ihrem Bauch oder Ihrem Po bewegt. Daher können sich Anhänge nur gemeinsam mit dem Innenskelett Ihres Avatars bewegen.
  43. 1 point
    Em outros idiomas Adicione alguém à sua lista de amigos Como aceitar ou recusar uma oferta de amizade Tutorial em vídeo Regras de comportamento para amigos Parceiros Como fazer de alguém seu parceiro Como finalizar uma parceria Histórico da parceria Permitir que os amigos editem seus objetos O método de grupo O método de amigo Algumas coisas à observar Adicione alguém à sua lista de amigos Há várias maneiras de adicionar um amigo: Se vocês estiverem próximos no mundo virtual, basta clicar com o botão direito no avatar dele e selecionar Adicionar amigo. Se vocês não estiverem próximos ou se a pessoa estiver off-line, clique no botão Pessoas na parte inferior da janela do Visualizador e selecione a guia AMIGOS. Clique no botão + para abrir uma janela de pesquisa e digite o nome do seu amigo. Quando você adiciona um amigo, a janela Adicionar amigo permite que você digite uma mensagem personalizada. Use esse espaço para explicar porque você quer a amizade ou lembrar à pessoa como vocês se conheceram. Quando a oferta de amizade for aceita, seus nomes aparecerão na lista de AMIGOS um do outro. Todas as amizades são bidirecionais. Se você excluir um amigo, você não aparecerá mais na lista de amigos dele. Como aceitar ou recusar uma oferta de amizade Quando outro residente lhe oferece amizade, uma caixa de diálogo aparece no canto superior direito da tela. A caixa de diálogo também aparece nas janelas de Conversas, como se uma mensagem tivesse sido enviada para você. Se você clicar em Aceitar, seu novo amigo receberá uma notificação na tela de que você aceitou a oferta de amizade. Clique em Recusar para cancelar a oferta de amizade. A outra pessoa receberá uma notificação na tela de que você recusou a oferta de amizade. Regras de comportamento para amigos O preenchimento do seu perfil e a leitura do perfil de outros residentes são uma grande oportunidade de estabelecer conversas. Se vocês se derem bem, sinta-se à vontade para oferecer sua amizade. Para dicas não-oficiais para residente sobre como socializar ou fazer amigos, acesse SLetiquette. Parceiros Os casais no Second Life podem oficializar seus relacionamentos. Se você for casados ou simplesmente conectados podem colocar o nome de seu companheiro(a) no seu perfil in-world. Seu estado civil será visível para o resto da comunidade. Nota: Criar uma parceria custa L$10 para cada parceiro. A parceria é algo para se exibir, somente para propósitos sociais. Isso não altera as permissões inworld, as habilidades de grupo, suporte aos benefícios e assim por diante. Por exemplo, se você é um membro Premium e o seu parceiro tem uma conta Básica, ele/ela não receberá qualquer benefício Premium. A parceria também não afeta o seu nome de usuário no Second Life. Nem dá o direito de compartilhar a conta do seu parceiro no Second Life. Para mais informações sobre as políticas relacionadas ao compartilhamento de contas, acesse Permitindo que outros acessem ou transfiram suas contas no Second Life. Como fazer de alguém seu parceiro Para fazer alguém seu parceiro, siga esses passos: Vá na página Parceiros. Digite o nome de usuário do seu Parceiro. Digite a sua Proposta para essa parceria. Pode ser uma carta de amor, uma letra de música ou o que convier para ambos. Clique em Enviar proposta. O seu parceiro em potencial será notificado pelo e-mail que está na conta do Second Life. Ele ou ela tem sete dias para aprovar. Uma vez que a proposta tenha sido aprovada, seus nomes aparecerão no perfil um do outro. O e-mail de parceria deverá ser recebido em pouco tempo. Verifique sua caixa de spam e outros filtros que seu e-mail possa ter e certifique-se de que não tenha sido escondido. Se você receber uma solicitação de parceria e desejar recusar, você pode fazer isso na Página de Parceiros. Como finalizar uma parceria A pessoa que se “divorcia" é taxada em L$25. Siga os procedimentos parra romper uma parceria: Abra a página Parceiros. Selecione “Eu, (seu nome), gostaria de desfazer a parceria com (o nome do seu parceiro)." Clique em Enviar. Sua parceria está desfeita e, agora, seu ex-parceiro será notificado. Uma vez que tenha desfeito uma parceria, você pode recriá-la seguindo o mesmo procedimento mencionado anteriormente e pagando L$10, novamente. Histórico da parceria O seu Visualizador de perfil não exibe a data em que a sua parceria começou, por isso, guarde a solicitação de parceria original (a que foi enviada por e-mail), se você desejar ter um registro com a data. Permitir que os amigos editem seus objetos Existem duas formas de habilitar que um amigo possa editar os seus objetos no Second Life. Isso geralmente refere-se como construção colaborativas ou criação colaborativa. É uma forma útil de permitir que os grupos de pessoas colaborem na construção de um projeto juntos. O método que você escolhe depende de o seu colaborador está em um grupo ou se ele/ela é seu amigo. O método de grupo Para habilitar um membro de um grupo que você está para editar seus objetos: Clique com o botão direito do mouse no objeto e escolha Editar. O editor de objeto abre. Clique na aba Geral no editor. Se você não puder ver as abas, clique em Mais. Clique no ícone Ferramenta no lado direito do Grupo e atribua o objeto ao grupo que seus amigos estiverem. Clique em OK. Selecione a caixa de verificação próximo à Compartilhar. Qualquer outros membros do grupo também podem ser capazes de editar o objeto. Os membros do grupo só podem editar objetos que forem compartilhados com o grupo. Nota: Se você quiser que outros membros do grupo sejam capazes de fazer cópias do seu objeto, certifique-se de ter selecionado a permissão ao proprietário (Copiar, Modificar, Revender/Dar fim) de forma apropriada. O método de amigo Para habilitar um amigo para editar seus objetos: Clique em na barra de ferramentas. A janela PESSOAS abrirá. Clique na aba AMIGOS para abrir a lista de amigos. Passe o mouse sobre o nome dos seus amigos e clique em para visualizar o perfil do seu amigo. Na página perfil que aparecer, clique em e escolha Permissões. Em Permitir (nome do amigo): selecione Editar, excluir ou pegar meus objetos. Clique em Salvar. Importante: Ao fazer isso, você dará os mesmos direitos de editar todos os seus objetos que você. Algumas coisas à observar Existem algumas coisas que você precisa ficar atento: O seu parceiros colaborativos só podem editar os objetos que você permitir. Ninguém que não seja você terá acesso ao seu inventário. Se você quiser que mais alguém possa editar um objeto seu, você precisa permitir inworld primeiro. Os seus parceiros colaborativos não podem editar as permissões do proprietário em um objeto que eles receberam acesso. Não tecnicamente possível conectar dois objetos juntos se eles tiverem dois proprietários diferentes. Mesmo se os proprietários derem a cada um permissões para editar. Seu parceiro colaborativo não pode editar seus objetos se eles tiverem Selecionar somente meus objetos habilitados em Construir > Opções na barra de menu superior.
  44. 1 point
    Acquistare e vendere dollari Linden Nel mondo virtuale LindeX Come ottenere dollari Linden senza acquistarli Guadagnare dollari Linden Lo stipendio dell'account Premium Problemi comuni con LindeX Ho acquistato dollari Linden (L$) ma il mio saldo non è aggiornato Non mi è stato addebitato quanto mi aspettavo per l'acquisto di dollari Linden (L$) Non posso acquistare nulla su LindeX a causa di limiti di fatturazione e compravendita Non so quanti dollari Linden ho, dice solo "Caricamento in corso" Si possono visualizzare le transazioni precedenti agli ultimi 30 giorni? Vedi anche In altre lingue: Deutsch English Español Français 日本語 Português Русский Türkçe Acquistare e vendere dollari Linden L'unità di scambio in Second Life si chiama dollari Linden o L$. Puoi acquistare dollari Linden sia nel mondo virtuale che online su LindeX. Importante: Per acquistare dollari Linden devi aver selezionato un metodo di pagamento. Registra un metodo di pagamento. Nel mondo virtuale Per acquistare dollari Linden nel Viewer di Second Life, fai clic sul pulsante ACQUISTA L$ a fianco al saldo corrente in dollari Linden. Nella finestra ACQUISTA L$, inserisci semplicemente il numero di dollari Linden che desideri acquistare e fai clic su Acquista ora. I dollari Linden acquistati nel mondo virtuale hanno lo stesso valore di quelli utilizzati per gli acquisti sul sito di Second Life. LindeX LindeX è il cambio virtuale ufficiale di Second Life gestito da Linden Lab in cui puoi: Acquistare dollari Linden al tasso di scambio corrente. Creare offerte di acquisto con limite al tasso di scambio richiesto (o a un tasso migliore). Vendere dollari Linden. Per un elenco di metodi di pagamento e valute accettate, vedi Addebito. Tutte le transazioni LindeX sono soggette a tariffe per la transazione. Acquisto e vendita al prezzo di mercato Gli acquisti e le vendite al prezzo di mercato sono il metodo più semplice e rapido per acquistare o vendere dollari Linden sul sito Second Life. LindeX abbina automaticamente il tuo ordine con il migliore tasso di scambio. Il tasso di cambio indicato comprende le spese per la transazione. Per impostare un acquisto al prezzo di mercato: Visita https://secondlife.com/my/lindex/buy.php Inserisci la quantità di dollari Linden (L$) da acquistare oppure la quantità di dollari USA (US$) da spendere. Fai clic su Completa ordine. Quando richiesto, inserisci la tua password di Second Life. Per impostare una vendita al prezzo di mercato: Visita https://secondlife.com/my/lindex/sell.php Inserisci la Quantità di L$ da vendere. Fai clic sul pulsante Vendi . Nota: a differenza degli acquisti a prezzo di mercato, le vendite a prezzo di mercato non vengono eseguite istantaneamente. Acquisto con limite (acquisto al prezzo migliore) e vendita con limite Gli acquisti e le vendite con limite (acquisto al prezzo migliore) ti permettono di specificare la quantità di dollari Linden e il tasso di scambio che sei disposto ad accettare. LindeX troverà automaticamente le offerte di acquisto e vendita corrispondenti quando si presentano. Se stai acquistando, devi avere un credito in US$ sufficiente nel tuo account Second Life per pagare l'ordine di acquisto. Per impostare un acquisto con limite: Visita https://secondlife.com/my/lindex/buy.php Nella sezione Acquisto con limite, inserisci la Quantità di L$ che desideri acquistare. Nella casella Tasso di cambio in L$ / US$1,00, inserisci il tasso minimo che sei disposto ad accettare. Fai clic su Completa ordine. Quando richiesto, inserisci la tua password di Second Life. Per impostare un acquisto al prezzo di mercato: Visita https://secondlife.com/my/lindex/sell.php Nella sezione Offerta di vendita di Linden Dollar (con limite), inserisci la Quantità di L$ da vendere. Nella casella Tasso di cambio in L$ / US$1,00, inserisci il tasso massimo che sei disposto ad accettare. Fai clic su Offerta di acquisto. Se cambi idea riguardo a quanti dollari Linden acquistare o vendere, o riguardo al tasso che sei disposto ad accettare, puoi cancellare un'offerta in corso sulla pagina LindeX: Cronologia delle transazioni. Nota: Poiché i tassi di cambio su LindeX variano, potrebbe essere necessario attendere del tempo per completare l’acquisto o la vendita con limite (acquisto al prezzo migliore) al tasso desiderato. Se il tasso minimo è troppo alto, la transazione potrebbe essere ritardata in maniera permanente. Come ottenere dollari Linden senza acquistarli Guadagnare dollari Linden Puoi guadagnare dollari Linden vendendo beni oppure offrendo servizi ad altri Residenti. Per informazioni su come diventare un rivenditore, leggi Vendere nel Mercato. Consulta la Guida ai lavori in Second Life per una panoramica dei lavori ideati dai nostri Residenti. Lo stipendio dell'account Premium I membri Premium ricevono uno stipendio settimanale di L$300. Cambia il livello del tuo account da Basic a Premium per iniziare a ricevere lo stipendio. Per maggiori informazioni consulta Abbonamenti Premium. Problemi comuni con LindeX Ho acquistato dollari Linden ma il mio saldo non è aggiornato Se hai acquistato Linden Dollar (L$) attraverso LindeX, dovrebbero venire aggiunti al tuo saldo quasi immediatamente. Se non appaiono neanche dopo un periodo di tempo ragionevole, qualcosa potrebbe essere andato storto. Per prima cosa, consulta il Blog di Second Life per verificare se siamo già al corrente del problema e stiamo cercando una soluzione. Se un problema coinvolge un gran numero di Residenti, è probabile che stiamo già lavorando per risolverlo. Se pare che il problema sia limitato a te, apri una richiesta di assistenza. Non mi è stato addebitato quanto mi aspettavo per l'acquisto di dollari Linden I tassi indicati su LindeX sono stime approssimative e non garantiscono un ammontare esatto per la transazione. Quando viene effettuato un ordine al prezzo di mercato, viene completato al prezzo più basso in L$ disponibile al momento. Il mercato è molto attivo, per cui un ordine che risulta disponibile potrebbe non esserlo più quando ne effettui uno nuovo. Per acquistare L$ a un prezzo specifico, prendi in considerazione di effettuare un ordine con limite. Non posso acquistare nulla su LindeX a causa di limiti di fatturazione e compravendita Vedi Limiti di fatturazione e compravendita per controllare i tuoi limiti e verificare che i problemi siano effettivamente legati ad essi. Il tuo livello verrà evidenziato se hai effettuato l'accesso. Se non sembra essere questo il problema, puoi richiedere una revisione del tuo account per aumentare i tuoi limiti inoltrando una richiesta di assistenza: Nel campo Quale tipo di problema hai? seleziona Addebito. In Addebito seleziona Richiesta di esame dei limiti di compravendita e addebito in LindeX Completa gli altri campi come indicato, quindi fai clic su Invia. La tua richiesta verrà esaminata e ti verrà inviata una risposta entro cinque giorni lavorativi. Non so quanti dollari Linden ho, dice solo "Caricamento in corso" Non farti prendere dal panico! Se hai appena eseguito l'accesso e l'ammontare in L$ indicato nell'angolo in alto a destra dello schermo indica "Caricamento in corso", il tuo saldo in L$ non è stato ancora caricato e verrà mostrato a breve. A volte, a causa di problemi al server, può capitare che in caso di carichi elevati i dati non vengano caricati rapidamente. Ricorda che mentre attendi nel mondo virtuale, puoi anche verificare il tuo saldo in Linden Dollar nella sezione Il tuo account del sito Web. Nota: Diversa è l'eventuale indicazione "L$0” nel saldo, che starebbe a significare che non ci sono più L$ disponibili. Per evitare che ciò accada, è importante conoscere i nostri Termini del servizio. Suggerimenti Se hai aspettato cinque minuti e il saldo in L$ continua ad indicare "Caricamento in corso", prova una delle opzioni seguenti: Prova a teleportarti in un'altra Regione. Prova ad uscire da Second Life e quindi esegui nuovamente l'accesso, se possibile in una Regione diversa. Solitamente il problema si risolve permettendo al Viewer di caricare nuovamente le informazioni . Chiedi a un amico di darti 1 L$. Se sei davvero gentile, restituisciglielo! Prova a caricare in bulk una singola immagine, suono o animazione. Carica solo un elemento! Ogni tentativo costa L$10. Ovviamente non devi spendere molti dollari Linden per scoprire quanti ne hai; se il problema persiste, invia una richiesta di assistenza attraverso il nostro Portale di assistenza. Si possono visualizzare le transazioni precedenti agli ultimi 30 giorni? Attualmente non si possono visualizzare le transazioni in dollari Linden (L$) precedenti agli ultimi 30 giorni. Puoi scaricare in un foglio Excel tutte le transazioni degli ultimi 30 giorni e conservarle come riferimento futuro. Per scaricare la cronologia delle transazioni: Vai su https://secondlife.com/account/transactions.php Nel campo A partire da seleziona la data meno recente possibile Fai clic sul pulsante Visualizza Visualizza le transazioni oppure scaricale in formato CSV, XML o XLS. Ho venduto dollari Linden. Come trasferisco i miei soldi da Second Life? Puoi scegliere di ritirare i tuoi dollari US via PayPal o tramite bonifico bancario. Per effettuare un bonifico, vai su Elaborazione credito. Per avere ulteriori informazioni sulle opzioni disponibili e le limitazioni, vedi Saldo account. Vedi anche Cambio LindeX™: Limiti di addebito e compravendita
  45. 1 point
    Diğer dillerde ABD doları bakiyesi ABD doları bakiyenizi kullanma yolları Second Life giderlerini öde Alacağı hesaba geçir (para çekme) Havaleler Linden Lab'a para gönderme Linden Lab'dan para alma ABD doları bakiyesi Tüm Second Life® hesapları hem bir Linden doları bakiyesine hem de bir ABD doları bakiyesine sahiptir. Her iki bakiyeyi de secondlife.com sitesinde Hesap sayfanızdaki Linden Doları Özeti sayfasında görebilirsiniz. Yeni bir Second Life hesabınız oluşturduğunuzda, ABD doları bakiyeniz 0$'dır. LindeX üzerinde L$ satarak ABD doları bakiyenizi artırabilirsiniz. Nadir durumlarda, Linden Lab'dan US$ kredisi de alabilirsiniz. SL Dünyasında veya Second Life Pazaryeri'nde alım yapmak için L$ kullanılabilir; US$ hesabınızla ilgili diğer amaçlar için kullanılabilir. ABD doları bakiyenizin kullanımı ABD doları bakiyenizi aşağıda açıklanan çeşitli yollarla kullanıma sokabilirsiniz. Second Life giderlerini öde Özel üyelik ücretinizi, arazi kullanım ücretlerini, özel gayrimenkul ücretlerini öderken, Linden doları satın alırken veya bir Özel Bölge satın alırken, Linden Lab bu ücretleri ABD doları bakiyenizden tahsil eder. ABD doları bakiyeniz giderlerinizi karşılamıyorsa, kullanılabilir tüm US$ kredisi ücret için kullanılır. Daha sonra kalan tutar tercih ettiğiniz ödeme yöntemi aracılığıyla tahsil edilir. (USD bakiyenizin yanındaki "KULLANMA" düğmesine tıklayarak tam tutarı ödeme yönteminize fatura edin.) Yeterli miktarda Linden doları kazanırsanız, bunları LindeX üzerinde satarak ABD doları bakiyenizi artırabilirsiniz. Bazı Sakinlerin özel hesapları kendi masrafını öder! Alacağı hesaba geçir (para çekme) Güncelleme: 6 Haziran 2016 tarihi itibarıyla, Türk Second Life Sakinleri PayPal'ı kullanarak ABD doları bakiyelerindeki alacağı hesaba geçirememektedir . Bununla birlikte, Türk Sakinlerin Skrill'i kullanarak alım yapmaları veya alacaklarını hesaba geçirmeleri hala mümkündür. PayPal'ın Türkiye'deki faaliyetlerini askıya alması hakkında daha fazla bilgi için lütfen PayPal internet sitesini ziyaret edin (Türkçe). Linden Doları satışlarınızdan elde ettiğiniz net gelir Second Life hesabınızda alacak olarak tutulur ve bu alacak yukarıda belirtilen şekilde otomatik olarak hesap ücretlerinizi karşılamak için kullanılır. Linden Doları satış gelirinizi ücretlerinizi karşılamak için kullanmak istemiyorsanız, gerçek hayattaki bir ödeme yoluyla hesap alacağınızdaki bu payı çekebilirsiniz. (Bkz. Alacağı Hesaba Geçir) Sadece Linden Doları satışlarından elde edilen net gelire bağlı alacağı hesaba geçirebileceğinizi unutmayın. Hesap alacakları ve hediye kodlarına bağlı alacaklar veya diğer tanıtım amaçlı hesap alacakları ile yapılan alımlarda ücret geri ödenmez ve size ödeme yapmak için kullanılamaz. Alacak ödemesi işlemi aracılığıyla herhangi bir ödeme alabilmek için Hizmet Sözleşmesi koşullarımıza tam olarak uymanız gerekmektedir. Bu koşullar, bununla sınırlı olmamak kaydıyla, doğrulanabilir fatura bilgileri dahil olmak üzere, doğru ve eksiksiz kayıt bilgilerinin sağlanması şartını da içerir. Belirli durumlarda, Linden Lab bir talebi işleme koymadan önce sizden ek bilgiler talep edebilir. Zamanında sağlandığı takdirde, bu ek adım işlem sürelerini önemli ölçüde geciktirmeyecektir. Aşağıdaki tabloda, talebinizi gönderdiğiniz güne bağlı olarak USD cinsinden paranızın PayPal hesabınıza ne zaman ulaşacağı tahmini olarak verilmektedir. USD cinsinden paranızı listelenen tarihte veya öncesinde PayPal hesabınıza görmeyi bekleyebilirsiniz. Taleplerin çoğunda, PayPal veya Skrill hesabınıza gönderilen ödemeyi iki iş günü içinde alırsınız. Ancak, taleplerin az bir bölümünde, bu işlem beş iş gününü bulabilir. ABD'deki iş tatilleri iki veya beş günlük iş günü penceresini bir gün uzatır. Talep Edilen Gün İki İş Günü Sonra Beş İş Günü Sonra Pazartesi Çarşamba Ertesi Pazartesi Salı Perşembe Ertesi Salı Çarşamba Cuma Ertesi Çarşamba Perşembe Ertesi Pazartesi Ertesi Perşembe Cuma Ertesi Salı Ertesi Cuma Cumartesi Ertesi Çarşamba Ertesi Pazartesi (Sekiz takvim günü sonra) Pazar Ertesi Çarşamba Ertesi Pazartesi (Yedi takvim günü sonra) USD alacağımı hesap bakiyemden nasıl çekebilirim? ABD doları bakiyenizi PayPal veya Skrill aracılığıyla çekmeyi tercih edebilirsiniz. Second Life sistemindeki alacağınızı gerçek hayattaki hesabınıza geçirmeyi talep ettiğinizden dolayı, bu işlem alacağı hesaba geçirme talebi olarak bilinir. Tercih ettiğiniz para çekme seçeneğine bağlı olarak, ücrete ve minimum çekim tutarlarına tabi olabilirsiniz. Nasıl bir ödeme yöntemi seçebilirim? Yeni sistemi kullanarak Second Life'taki alacağınızı gerçek hayattaki hesabınıza geçirme talebinde bulunduğunuzda, sizden bir ödeme yöntemi seçmeniz istenecektir. Alacağınızı PayPal hesabınıza geçirme talebinde bulunmak için, talep formu'nda PayPal e-posta adresinizi seçmeniz gerekir. Bu formda halihazırda secondlife.com sitesinde kayıtlı olan PayPal hesaplarınızın yanı sıra alacağı hesaba geçirme talepleri için kullandığınız PayPal hesabı (eski alacağı hesaba geçirme sisteminde daha önce talepte bulunduysanız) listelenir. Alacağınızı Skrill hesabınıza geçirme talebinde bulunmak için, talep formu'nda Skrill e-posta adresinizi seçmeniz gerekir. Bu formda halihazırda secondlife.com sitesinde kayıtlı olan Skrill hesaplarınızın yanı sıra alacağı hesaba geçirme talepleri için kullandığınız Skrill hesapları (eski alacağı hesaba geçirme sisteminde daha önce talepte bulunduysanız) listelenir. Mevcut hesaplardan birini seçin veya Ödeme Yöntemini Değiştir penceresinde ödeme yöntemi olarak yeni bir PayPal/Skrill hesabı ekleyin: Not: Ödeme yönteminizi değiştirdiğiniz takdirde, talebi işleme koymadan önce kimliğinizi doğrulamak amacıyla ek bilgiler talep edebiliriz. Bu doğrulama sizin güvenliğiniz içindir. Başkasının PayPal veya Skrill hesabına para gönderebilir miyim? Alacağı hesaba geçirme talepleri kendi kontrolünüzde olan bir PayPal veya Skrill hesabına gönderilmelidir. Bunlar başkasına ödeme yapmak için kullanılmamalıdır. Minimum veya maksimum bir tutar var mı? Alacağı hesaba geçirmede izin verilen minimum tutar, varsa işlem ücretleri dahil, 10$'dır. Maksimum işlem tutarı, ücretler hariç 9.999$'dır. Gerekirse, daha küçük tutarda birden çok işlem aracılığıyla daha büyük bir tutarı hesaba geçirebilirsiniz. Hesabınızı kalıcı olarak kapatıyorsanız, 10$'dan az olsa bile, ABD doları bakiyenizin tamamını çekme talebinde bulunabilirsiniz. Bu, 10$ minimum çekim tutarının geçerli olmadığı tek durumdur. Bu işlemi başlatırken, lütfen yardım için Destek Ekibine başvurun. Alacakları hesaba geçirmenin maliyeti nedir? Her alacağı hesaba geçirme işlemi için bir ücret alınır. Bu ücret şu anda talep başına 1$'dır; ancak, ücretler gelecekte değişebilir. Ücretler forma girdiğiniz tutardan düşülür, dolayısıyla PayPal veya Skrill hesabınızdaki tutardan daha az bir tutar alırsınız. Daha az sıklıkla daha büyük tutarları hesaba geçirerek ücretlerden tasarruf edebilirsiniz. Alacakların hesaba geçirilmesi ne kadar sürer? Alacağı bir PayPal veya Skrill hesabına geçirirken, taleplerin yerine getirilmesi genellikle beş iş gününe varan bir süre alabilir (Pazartesi-Cuma, ABD'deki tatiller hariç). İşlemleri her zaman hızlı şekilde yerine getirmeye gayret ediyoruz; ancak, tatiller ve işlem hacmi işlem sürelerini etkileyebilir. Ayrıca, Linden Lab'ın bir Sakinden ek bilgiler talep etmesi durumunda, işlem süresi Sakin tarafından bilgilerin vaktinde gönderilmesine bağlı olacaktır. Önceki ve bekleyen taleplerimi nasıl kontrol edebilirim? Alacağı hesaba geçirme işlemlerinizin tüm geçmişini görüntülemek için, Alacağı Hesaba Geçirme Geçmişi sayfasına bakın. Henüz PayPal veya Skrill hesabına gönderilmemiş son taleplerde zaman damgasının yanında "işleniyor" ifadesi yer alır. Talep yerine getirilmiş görünüyorsa, ancak para PayPal veya Skrill hesabınıza geçmediyse, lütfen yardım için Destek Ekibine başvurun. Bir alacağı hesaba geçirme işlemini nasıl iptal edebilirim? Alacak talebinde bulunurken yanlış tutar veya yanlış PayPal/Skrill hesap bilgisi girmiş olabilirsiniz. Bir hata yaptığınızı düşünüyorsanız, lütfen Alacağı Hesaba Geçirme Geçmişi'nizi kontrol edin ve sonra yardım için Destek Ekibine başvurun. İptal edilecek talebi bize bildirmeniz gerekecektir (talebi tanımlamak için tarih/saat ve tutar belirtin). Talebi geri çevirebilmemiz ve parayı hesap bakiyenize iade edebilmemiz için, lütfen bizi mümkün olduğunca erken bilgilendirin. Daha sonra, tekrar çekim talebinde bulunabilirsiniz veya paranızı Second Life hesap ücretlerinizi ödemek için kullanabilirsiniz. Havaleler Linden Lab'a para gönderme Linden Lab artık bankanızdan havale yoluyla ödeme kabul edememektedir. Lütfen bakiye ödemenizi kredi kartı, Paypal veya Skrill aracılığıyla yapın. Linden Lab'dan para alma Linden Lab artık bankanıza havale yoluyla ödeme yapılmasını desteklememektedir. USD bakiyenize ödeme yapmak istiyorsanız, lütfen bunu PayPal veya Skrill aracılığıyla yapın.
  46. 1 point
    Sommaire Présentation des catégories/niveaux de contenu Que sont les catégories/niveaux de contenu ? Général Modéré Adulte Définition des préférences de catégorie/niveau de contenu Catégories/niveaux de contenu et accès aux médias Voix Gestes et sons Médias des parcelles Niveaux de contenu et recherche   Autres langues : Deutsch Español English Português Italiano 日本語 Русский Türkçe Présentation des catégories/niveaux de contenu Important : les catégories/niveaux de contenu Second Life sont les suivants : Général (« PG » dans les clients précédents) Modéré (« Mature » dans les clients précédents) Adulte Que sont les catégories/niveaux de contenu ? Il s'agit du type de contenu et de comportement autorisé au sein d'une région. Ce classement a un impact sur les résultats de la recherche. Il existe trois catégories/niveaux de contenu dans Second Life : Général, Modéré et Adulte. Pour accéder aux résultats de recherche et aux régions Adulte, vous devez avoir au moins 18 ans. Pour plus d'informations, consultez l'article Accès aux terrains et contenu Adulte. Général Une région peut être classée Général uniquement si elle ne présente pas de publicité pour ni n'inclut de contenu ou d'activités à caractère sexuellement explicite ou violent et ne montre pas de la nudité. En outre, il est strictement interdit de placer ou vendre des objets à caractère sexuel, tels que des « sex-beds » ou des « poseballs », dans une région Général. Les régions Général sont des endroits où vous dites et faites des choses que vous seriez à l'aise de dire et de faire devant votre grand-mère ou une classe d'école primaire. Il peut être préférable pour les institutions telles que les universités, les sociétés organisant des conférences et les entreprises du monde réel de désigner leurs régions comme des régions Général, si cela est approprié. De même, les personnes les fréquentant (et les autres) peuvent avoir recours au filtre de recherche Général de Second Life afin de cibler les résultats de façon appropriée. Certains résidents et propriétaires de terrains désirent vivre, dans Second Life, une expérience loin des activités prenant place dans les régions Modéré et Adulte. Les propriétaires de régions souhaitant accueillir ce genre d'expérience peuvent (mais ne doivent pas nécessairement) désigner leurs régions comme Général. Si vous êtes propriétaire d'une région et que vous n'êtes pas sûr que son contenu et ses activités sont autorisés dans les régions Général, il est préférable de la désigner comme Modéré. Astuce : ajoutez les Règles communautaires et les Conditions d'utilisation à vos favoris afin d'y avoir rapidement accès. Modéré Le niveau de contenu Modéré est destiné à la plupart des activités non expressément adultes courantes dans Second Life. Pour autant qu'ils n'accueillent pas ni ne promeuvent publiquement du contenu ou du comportement adulte tels que définis pour le niveau Adulte et qu'ils n'utilisent pas de mots-clés de recherche à caractère adulte, les endroits pour danser, les bars, les magasins et centres commerciaux, les galeries, les concerts, les plages et les parcs (ainsi que tout espace de rencontre, création et apprentissage) peuvent être désignés comme de niveau Modéré. Les groupes, événements et petites annonces se rapportant à cette large gamme d'activités et de thèmes sont généralement à classer comme Modéré. Ainsi, les résidents doivent s'attendre à voir dans ces endroits une grande variété de thèmes et de contenu. Les magasins vendant une gamme d'articles comprenant certains vêtements ou objets « sexy » peuvent généralement être localisés dans des régions Modéré plutôt que Adulte. Les endroits pour danser présentant des spectacles de cabaret peuvent généralement être aussi localisés dans des régions Modéré, à condition qu'ils ne promeuvent pas de comportements sexuels comme, par exemple, au moyen de « poseballs » (que ce soit dans des arrière-salles ou des endroits plus visibles). Cependant, si l'un de ces endroits utilise des mots-clés de recherche à caractère adulte, la région peut être classée Adulte et dès lors ne plus figurer dans les résultats d'une recherche portant sur le contenu non-adulte. Adulte La désignation Adulte s'applique aux régions de Second Life qui accueillent des comportements ou présentent des contenus sexuellement explicites ou extrêmement violents, ou qui dépeignent l'utilisation de drogues. Toute région doit être classée comme Adulte si elle accueille, présente ou promeut publiquement ce qui suit : Des représentations d'actes extrêmement violents (par exemple, dépeignant la mort, la torture, le démembrement ou d'autres dommages corporels graves), qu'elles soient ou non photoréalistes (c'est-à-dire dont les images ne peuvent être distinguées d'une photographie) De la nudité photoréaliste Du contenu, des espaces ou des activités à thème expressément sexuel (photoréalistes ou non) tel qu'entendu au sens large, à savoir toute activité et tout comportement à caractère sexuel Les groupes, avis d'événements ou petites annonces faisant référence à ces thèmes ou contenus doivent également être classés Adulte. Linden Lab fera respecter ces règles, mais il lui est impossible de contrôler tous les contenus ou comportements éphémères dans Second Life. Ainsi : Les régions, groupes, événements ou petites annonces utilisant des mots-clés de recherche indiquant des contenus ou comportements adultes doivent être désignés comme Adulte et uniquement accessibles aux résidents ayant plus de 18 ans. Linden Lab effectuera des contrôles proactifs et se basera sur les rapports d'infraction signalant un contenu ou comportement adulte pour lequel il est fait publiquement de la promotion ou de la publicité. Si un tel contenu ou comportement est publiquement promu dans une région, celle-ci doit être classée Adulte (ou ce contenu ou comportement doit disparaître). À défaut, le classement de cette région sera modifié d'office par Linden Lab. Linden Lab tiendra compte des cas où un contenu ou comportement apparent ou signalé dans une région particulière n'a qu'un rôle extrêmement limité ou passif, ou sert un but éducatif ou culturel, et est, par conséquent, approprié pour tout public dans Second Life. Comme pour toutes les infractions signalées, chaque rapport relatif à un comportement adulte sera activement examiné et les résidents disposeront d'un moyen de le réfuter. Les parcelles accueillant ou présentant des activités ou du contenu à caractère adulte doivent se trouver sur : Zindra, le continent Adulte ; une région privée désignée par son propriétaire comme Adulte. Il appartient aux propriétaires de régions d'attribuer un niveau de contenu (catégorie d'accès) aux régions. Les résidents sont censés s'installer dans une région appropriée à leurs activités et au contenu qu'ils veulent utiliser. Pour plus d'informations sur ce qui constitue un contenu Adulte, consultez l'article de FAQ sur le contenu Adulte. Définition des préférences de catégorie/niveau de contenu Pour choisir un type de contenu à afficher, accédez à Moi > Préférences, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Général. L'article Accès aux terrains et contenu Adulte comporte plus d'informations à ce sujet. Catégories/niveaux de contenu et accès aux médias La configuration de votre catégorie/niveau de contenu ainsi que celle des parcelles de terrains proches de vous peuvent affecter votre capacité à entendre des sons et des voix. Voix Un canal de domaine différent est utilisé pour les communications vocales dans les régions désignées comme  Adulte. Ainsi, les résidents qui se trouvent dans une région Adulte peuvent uniquement parler aux résidents également situés dans une région Adulte proche d'eux. Si vous vous trouvez dans une région Adulte, à proximité d'une frontière avec une région  Général ou  Modéré, les résidents de cette autre région ne pourront pas vous entendre parler, de même que vous ne pourrez pas les entendre parler. Le chat écrit traverse les frontières régionales, quel que soit le niveau du contenu. Remarque : les catégories/niveaux de contenu des régions n'affectent pas les chats vocaux des groupes et privés, qui fonctionnent de la même manière où que vous vous trouviez. Gestes et sons La gestion des gestes et autres sons exécutés dans Second Life diffère de celle du chat vocal. C'est la configuration de votre propre catégorie/niveau de contenu qui détermine si vous entendez ou non les sons provenant d'une région Modéré ou Adulte. Pour pouvoir entendre les sons d'une région spécifique, votre catégorie/niveau de contenu doit être au moins équivalent(e) à celle/celui de la région. Exemples Si vous avez défini votre catégorie/niveau sur Général, vous ne pouvez entendre que les sons et les gestes provenant d'une région également désignée comme Général. Si vous avez défini votre catégorie/niveau sur Modéré, vous pouvez entendre les sons et les gestes provenant des régions désignées comme Général ou Modéré. Si vous avez au moins 18 ans et que vous avez défini votre catégorie/niveau de contenu sur Adulte, vous pouvez entendre les sons et les gestes provenant de toute région proche, Adulte comprise. Médias des parcelles Par définition, les médias d'une parcelle restent confinés à la parcelle pour laquelle ils sont définis. Si votre avatar n'est pas autorisé à accéder à une parcelle de terrain, vous ne pouvez pas voir ni entendre les médias qui y sont exécutés. Niveaux de contenu et recherche Dans le client Second Life, les résultats de recherche sont filtrés en fonction de vos préférences de contenu et du niveau du contenu (catégorie du contenu) trouvé. Sur le site Web, seuls les résultats appartenant à la catégorie Général s'affichent. Recherche sur le Web Il est possible de trouver du contenu dans Second Life à partir des pages Web suivantes : Recherche de Second Life : renvoie uniquement des résultats relatifs à du contenu  Général. Petites annonces : renvoie uniquement des résultats relatifs à du contenu  Général. Place du marché : renvoie des résultats relatifs au niveau de contenu que vous avez choisi si vous avez plus de 18 ans. Par défaut, tous les résultats renvoyés sur ces pages Web sont destinés à un niveau Général. Recherche de Second Life Accédez à search.secondlife.com ou cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher disponible sur le site Web Second Life pour trouver du contenu dans les domaines suivants : Résidents Lieux Événements Groupes Informations sur le wiki Second Life Informations sur Secondlife.com Choisissez un onglet dans la liste de gauche afin de filtrer les résultats. Sélectionnez TOUT pour que la recherche porte sur toutes les catégories. Les résultats sont classés par pertinence vis-à-vis des mots-clés utilisés dans la recherche et par popularité d'article. La page Recherche de Second Life renvoie uniquement des résultats relatifs au contenu  Général. Pour effectuer une recherche sur du contenu  Modéré et  Adulte, vous devez utiliser le client. L'article Accès aux terrains et contenu Adulte fournit plus d'informations sur l'affichage des autres types de contenu dans Second Life. Petites annonces Pour parcourir les petites annonces de la communauté, connectez-vous au site Web Second Life et choisissez Communauté > Petites annonces. Pour filtrer les résultats : Cliquez sur + Plus d'options. Sélectionnez une catégorie dans la liste déroulante. Sélectionnez un niveau de contenu (catégorie d'accès). Par défaut, la préférence définie dans votre client est appliquée. Cliquez sur Soumettre. Seules les petites annonces de niveau Général sont affichées sur le site Web. Utilisez le client pour parcourir les annonces de niveau Modéré ou Adulte si vous avez au moins 18 ans. Place du marché Vous pouvez affiner votre recherche sur les annonces des articles de la Place du marché Second Life en définissant un niveau de contenu. Pour plus d'informations, consultez l'article Achats sur la Place du marché Second Life. Recherche dans le client Cliquez sur le bouton Recherche de la barre d'outils pour ouvrir la fenêtre de recherche de Second Life. Saisissez ensuite un mot-clé, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. Sept filtres sont disponibles dans la partie gauche et le menu déroulant, comme indiqué ci-dessous : Par défaut, les résultats de la catégorie Tout sont affichés, à savoir les résultats issus des filtres Personnes, Endroits et Groupes. Pour afficher uniquement les résultats de l'un des filtres Petites annonces, Événements, Guide des destinations, Groupes, Terrains à vendre/à louer, Personnes ou Endroits, cliquez sur l'onglet correspondant. Les résultats sont classés par pertinence vis-à-vis du mot-clé saisi et par popularité d'article. Si vous avez au moins 18 ans, vous pouvez également faire porter votre recherche sur du contenu Adulte en plus du contenu Général et Modéré. Pour cela, cochez la case Niveau de contenu appropriée, en haut à gauche de la fenêtre de recherche. Contenu Général Si, dans le client, vous avez défini vos préférences de contenu sur Général et Modéré ou Général, Modéré, Adulte, vous pouvez toujours filtrer votre recherche de façon à obtenir uniquement des résultats de niveau Général. Pour cela, cochez la case GÉNÉRAL dans l'onglet Tout de la fenêtre de recherche. Saisissez le texte recherché dans la case réservée à cet effet, puis cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher. Le contenu Général inclut les annonces ou avis associés aux régions Général ne comprenant aucun mot-clé adulte. Contenu Modéré Pour inclure le contenu Modéré dans les résultats, cochez la case MODÉRÉ dans la fenêtre de recherche. Le contenu Modéré inclut les annonces ou avis associés aux régions Modéré ne comprenant aucun mot-clé adulte. Contenu Adulte Pour inclure le contenu Adulte dans les résultats, cochez la case ADULTE dans la fenêtre de recherche. Tout ce qui se trouve dans une région Adulte est considéré comme du contenu réservé aux adultes. Pour effectuer une recherche sur du contenu adulte, vous devez avoir plus de 18 ans. Vous pouvez nous aider à affiner le filtrage du contenu adulte en soumettant une demande d'assistance en cas de blocage ou d'affichage incorrect de votre annonce ou avis. Si vous remarquez que des résultats portent sur des objets ne respectant pas les filtres de recherche Général ou Modéré, veuillez signaler une infraction. Des objets qui se trouvent sur un terrain Général ou Modéré et utilisent des mots-clés pour adultes ne doivent pas apparaître dans les résultats de recherche ou des rapports d'infraction seront soumis à leur sujet.  Petites annonces, Événements, Terrains à vendre/à louer, Endroits Vous pouvez rechercher du contenu Adulte dans ces onglets lorsque les trois critères ci-dessous sont respectés : Vous avez plus de 18 ans. Vous avez défini vos préférences sur du contenu Adulte. Vous avez coché la case de niveau de contenu ADULTE dans la fenêtre de recherche. S'ils ne le sont pas et que vous saisissez un mot-clé adulte dans la case de recherche, le système le filtre et fournit les résultats correspondant aux termes saisis restants. Onglets Petites annonces et Événements Les nouvelles petites annonces et nouveaux événements sont filtrés par niveau de contenu. Si vous essayez de créer une petite annonce ou un événement avec des termes pour adultes sur un terrain non-adulte, un message d'erreur vous est renvoyé. Si vous remarquez qu'une petite annonce ou un avis d'événement est associé(e) à un niveau de contenu incorrect dans la recherche, veuillez signaler l'infraction. Onglets Terrains à vendre/à louer et Endroits  Dans ces onglets : Cochez la case GÉNÉRAL pour afficher uniquement les résultats de recherche associés aux régions Général. Cochez la case MODÉRÉ pour afficher les résultats de recherche associés aux régions Modéré. Cochez la case ADULTE pour afficher les résultats de recherche associés aux régions Adulte. Onglet Personnes Le système de recherche ne filtre pas les mots-clés lorsque vous recherchez des noms ou profils d'avatar. Les informations contenues dans les profils des résidents doivent être de niveau Général. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous aux Règles communautaires. Onglet Groupes Le système filtre les recherches de l'onglet Groupes de la même manière que pour l'onglet Tout. Vous pouvez inclure ou exclure les groupes Modéré en cochant ou non la case appropriée. Si des mots-clés adultes sont utilisés dans le cadre d'un nom de groupe ou d'une charte de groupe, le groupe s'affiche uniquement dans les résultats de recherche portant sur le contenu Adulte. FAQ Je n'ai pas accès à toutes les cases de niveau de contenu. Pourquoi ? Par défaut, tous les résidents ont accès au contenu Général et Modéré. Si vous avez plus de 18 ans, définissez vos préférences de façon à afficher le contenu Adulte. J'obtiens une erreur et peux uniquement accéder au contenu Général. Que faire ? Si, sur la page de recherche, le mot « Erreur » (« Error ») s'affiche en regard des cases de niveau de contenu et que seule la case Général est activée, il se peut que le client ait transmis un jeton d'autorisation incorrect. Pour réinitialiser l'autorisation, fermez le client et connectez-vous à nouveau. Si le problème persiste, assurez-vous que vous utilisez la version du client Second Life la plus récente avant de soumettre une demande d'assistance. Remarque : il est possible que les clients tiers ne prennent pas en charge les recherches sur le contenu Modéré et Adulte. Pour des résultats optimaux, utilisez le client Second Life officiel de Linden Lab. Comment m'assurer que mes objets s'affichent avec le niveau de contenu approprié dans les résultats de recherche ? Astuce : si votre terrain figure parmi des résultats de recherche associés à un niveau de contenu supérieur à celui auquel vous vous attendiez, cela peut signifier que votre contenu est inapproprié par rapport à la catégorie/au niveau de contenu de votre région.L'utilisation d'un langage inapproprié vis-à-vis de la catégorie/du niveau de contenu de votre région est contraire aux Conditions d'utilisation de Second Life et susceptible d'entraîner une action disciplinaire. Les informations sur la région où vous vous trouvez (son nom, ses coordonnées, son niveau de contenu et le nom de la parcelle) sont disponibles dans la partie supérieure du client. Si votre région est de niveau Général, assurez-vous que les objets dont vous définissez l'affichage dans la recherche sont également de niveau Général. Si votre région est de niveau Modéré et que vous souhaitez afficher des objets Modéré dans la recherche, cochez la case Contenu Modéré dans l'onglet OPTIONS de la fenêtre À PROPOS DU TERRAIN. L'option Adulte ne figure pas dans ma liste de préférences. Comment l'activer ? Pour pouvoir accéder au paramètre Adulte, vous devez avoir plus de 18 ans.
  47. 1 point
  48. 0 points
    Finding items to buy Using boolean search operators Determining usage requirements Determining whether an item contains mesh content Adding items to your cart and giving gifts Giving gifts Editing your cart and paying After you buy Items delivered to the Received items folder Viewing your order history Unreceived and accidentally discarded items Writing a review Flagging an item on the Marketplace Email notification settings In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Finding items to buy The Second Life Marketplace is the place to buy an amazing assortment of virtual items sold by fellow Residents. The Marketplace fee and listing policies govern the types of items for sale, as well as advertising, fees, and other guidelines for using the Marketplace. To start shopping in the Second Life Marketplace: Go to marketplace.secondlife.com. If you're not already logged into secondlife.com, click Sign In in the upper-right. Enter your Second Life name and password, and click Login. You can look for items you wish to purchase in several ways: By using the search box at the top of the page. By browsing the Categories and Communities on the left. By scrolling through the Featured Items. Important: You must be age verified to view Adult content both inworld and on the Marketplace. In addition, you must adjust your maturity preferences to access both Moderate and Adult content. For more information, see Maturity ratings and Age-restricted content. To search for something specific: Enter keywords in the search bar at the top of the page. You can use the boolean operators AND, OR, and NOT to refine your search. As you type, the search bar attempts to automatically complete your entry based on current marketplace listings. If desired, click the All categories dropdown to specify a category. Select your preferred option from the Show maturity levels dropdown. Press the Enter key or click Search. Items matching your search parameters are displayed on the right. Tip: To search for a particular merchant or store, click the Merchants/Stores tab. Once you have located the store, click Search this store to search only within that store. Using boolean search operators Boolean operators are simple words such as AND, OR, and NOT that can be used to either combine or exclude specific words in a search, which can help to achieve more accurate search results. Here is a short guide on how and when to use each available operator: AND - Narrows your search by requiring both words to be included in each search result. For example, a search of "red AND green" returns only results containing both the words "red" and "green". OR - Broadens your search by only requiring one of the words to appear in each result. For example, a search of "boats OR planes" returns results containing: only the word "boats", only the word "planes", or both the words "boats" and "planes" NOT - Narrows your search by excluding results that contain the words after the NOT operator. For example, "summer NOT winter" returns results that contain the word "summer" but does not show any results containing the word "winter". Boolean search operators must always be written in CAPITAL LETTERS in order to be recognized by the Second Life Marketplace search. Determining usage requirements Some purchases may require certain conditions for use. For example, a prefabricated building requires that you own land upon which to place it. Some purchases may also come inside boxes, which require a specific un-boxing procedure as described in Opening boxes. Usage requirements can be found on the right side of all item listings in the Second Life Marketplace: Use It Now: This item will be delivered directly to you or a friend in Second Life, unpacked and ready to use. No land or sandbox required. Unpacking Required: This item requires you to find a place in Second Life (such as a sandbox) to unpack and use it. See Opening boxes for additional information. Land Required: This item requires that you have access to land in Second Life in order to unpack and use it. In addition to these usage requirements, you may also see a message stating, "This item contains wearable items for your avatar," indicating that the product contains one or more attachments or clothing items. Determining whether an item contains mesh content Second Life Viewer 3.0 or higher is required in order to view mesh content. Furthermore, any object that is partially or fully composed of mesh content has a land impact based on prim equivalents, which are determined by calculating the actual impact of the object on computing resources, rather than by simply counting the number of prims in an object. You can determine whether an object on the Marketplace contains Mesh by checking the right side of the listing, underneath Permissions. If the object contains mesh, there is an indicator stating either Mesh: Partial Mesh or Mesh: 100% Mesh. If the object does not contain mesh, this indicator does not appear. Adding items to your cart and giving gifts To add an item to your cart: Click the item you would like to buy to see the item's detailed description. Click Add to Cart or Buy Now. Add to Cart saves your purchase to your cart for later payment and delivery. You can keep shopping for more items. Add to Cart as Gift saves your purchase to your cart as a gift for another Resident. The item must cost L$1 or more for this button to appear. See Giving gifts below for more information about giving gifts. Buy Now takes you directly to the checkout screen but does not affect or purchase the other items already in your cart. Giving gifts If you want to send an item to another Resident as a gift: Follow the steps above to find the right gift. Click on the item and select Add to Cart As Gift. Enter the recipient's Second Life first name and last name and click Find Resident. Important: If the recipient has only a username, not a first name and last name, enter the username. The system will show the name as "username Resident." A gift message window appears. If you would like to include a gift message, enter one here. Click Finished. The gift is now in your cart for later payment and delivery. Editing your cart and paying When you've finished adding the items you want to buy to your cart, click the Cart button in the upper-right. For each item, you can choose to: Remove it from your cart by clicking the Remove From Cart link below the item name. Buy more or fewer of the same item by changing the number in the Qty box and clicking Update quantities. You can also update the quantity of individual items by clicking the update link next to that line item. Change the gift message (if it's a gift). Once your cart is edited to your satisfaction: Click the Check out button. Review your invoice, then click Buy now to purchase the items using your Linden dollar (L$) balance.. Tip: While reviewing your invoice, you may click More payment options to add or select an alternate payment method such as a credit card or PayPal account. Note: When you use PayPal or a credit card to make a Marketplace purchase, your Transaction History shows a debit or credit originating from "Commerce Linden" or "Marketplace Linden." After you buy Items delivered to the Received items folder After purchasing an item, log into Second Life. You will see a Received items section at the bottom of your Inventory window. Click it to expand the Received items pane and see items and folders you have recently received: You may drag received items and folders from the Received items pane to one of your existing inventory folders. If you are using a third-party viewer, the Received items pane appears as an inventory folder named Received items. If your purchase was packaged in a box for delivery, you need to open the box before you can use the item.Learn about opening boxes. If you bought clothing or other items to attach to your avatar, see Avatar attachments to learn how to use them. Viewing your order history You can see what you've purchased in your order history: Log into the Marketplace. Click My Marketplace > My Account. On the left, select Order history. You can also check other account-specific information here. Unreceived and accidentally discarded items Has it been more than 24 hours since you ordered? If so, contact the merchant, explain what happened, and politely request redelivery of the item. If it has been less than 24 hours, please be patient and check again later. If the merchant doesn't respond, you can submit a support case requesting redelivery. Make sure to include the order number and the exact name of the undelivered item(s). Note: If an item purchased on the Marketplace using PayPal or a credit card is not successfully delivered to you, the credit or debit will not appear in your transaction history, and the merchant will have no record of the purchase. Simply try to purchase the item again. If you accidentally discard an item, contact the merchant, explain what happened, and politely request redelivery of the item. Often the merchant will understand and redeliver, especially if the item in question isn't "no-copy." Unfortunately, Marketplace deliveries, unlike items sent manually from another avatar, are completely discarded and can't be retrieved from the Trash. Writing a review To write a review for an item you bought: Open your order history. Click Review Product in the order description for the item. Select the number of stars you want to give to that item, give your review a title, and write your review. Click Post your review. Tips for writing relevant and helpful reviews can be found at Writing Item Reviews on the Marketplace. Flagging an item on the Marketplace If you find merchandise on the Marketplace that you think is in violation of the Marketplace listing policies, please flag it for review by customer support. To flag an item: View the listing. Click Flag this item on the right. In the Reason for Flag dropdown, select your reason for flagging the item. In the Detailed Reason dropdown, select a more detailed reason. Click Flag to flag the item. Email notification settings You can change the types of email notifications you receive from the Second Life Marketplace: Visit http://marketplace.secondlife.com. If you are not already signed in, click Sign in in the top right corner of the page. Click My Marketplace at the top of the page, then select My account from the dropdown menu. Click Email settings on the left side of the My account page. On the Email settings page, under Shopping Notifications, click On or Off next to each type of email notification to set your notification preference. As a shopper on the Second Life Marketplace, you may receive the following types of email notifications: Order confirmation Gift notification Redelivery notification Revenue distribution notification Revenue distribution addition/removal notification
  49. 0 points
    Landmarks and teleporting Troubleshooting telporting SLurls How to use and make SLurls Converting a landmark to a SLurl (and vice-versa) Setting your home and login locations Home location Login location Landmarks and teleporting Landmarks Landmarks are similar to bookmarks or favorites in a web browser. They record a Second Life inworld location, so you can teleport back there whenever you want. To create a landmark for your current location, click the icon in the location bar at the top of the Viewer. Teleporting To teleport, double-click a landmark or a location on the World Map, or click a saved location in your favorites bar. Map - Chose World > World Map or World > Mini-Map. Using SLurls - Click on a SLurl to display the Place Profile, then click Teleport to teleport there. To offer to teleport a friend to your location: Click Click MY FRIENDS Mouse over your friend's name then click Click Teleport Your friend will see a message offering to teleport them to your location; they can accept or refuse the offer. Note: Your intended destination is marked with a red arrow. If you get a message that you can teleport no closer, simply put the landmark on your Map and fly the rest of the way. You can also use the Teleport buttons in Search listings to access locations. See Search FAQ for more information. If you don't arrive at your intended destination If you attempt to teleport somewhere, but don't arrive there, the estate owner may have set up a telehub (teleport hub) to control where visitors initially land. The telehub will be in the same region as your destination, but will generally provide new arrivals with orientation and other welcome information. Infohubs (also known as a Welcome Area) are mainland telehubs owned by Linden Lab and are shown on the world map. See World map and mini-map for more information. Troubleshooting teleporting Check maturity settings If the land you are trying to access has a maturity rating above that set in your own preferences, then you won't be able to go there. See Accessing Adult land and content for more information. To find the maturity rating of the land you are trying to access: Choose World > World map to view the World Map. Type the name of the region, then click Find. The World Map will show the region. Hover your cursor over the region on the map to see the maturity rating. Take off attachments An attachment you're wearing might be preventing you from teleporting successfully. Right-click your avatar. Select Take Off. Select Detach All. Try to teleport to your destination. Teleport to mainland Sometimes, it can help to try teleporting to your intended spot from a different destination. Click Map. Type in "Pooley". Click Search. Select Pooley from the list. Click Teleport. After you arrive at Pooley, try to teleport to your destination. Fly up, then teleport Your current location may be preventing you from teleporting successfully. Fly to an altitude of 200 meters. Try to teleport to your destination. Adjust firewall configuration If your firewall is blocking outbound TCP port 12043, then teleporting, viewing the World Map, crossing regions, and related activities won't work. See Using Second Life with a firewall for more information. Reduce maximum bandwidth Bandwidth settings might be responsible for an unsuccessful teleport. Select Me > Preferences. Click the Setup tab. Reduce the Maximum bandwidth setting to the minimum, "500" kbps. Now, try to teleport to your destination again. Exit Second Life and log in at your destination You can set your preferences so that you can choose your login location, and then enter your destination so you appear there when you log in again. To set your login location: Choose Me > Preferences. Click the General tab. Under Start location, choose Show on login. Click OK. Choose Me > Exit Second Life to log out. Then, start the Second Life Viewer again, and: In the login screen, under Start at, choose <Type region name>. Enter the name of the region where you want to go; for example, Pooley Click Log In. Now you will log in at the region you entered. Check for Network Lag If you are still having problems teleporting, your connection may be too slow. For more information, see How to improve Viewer performance - Troubleshooting tips. SLurls SLurls and landmarks serve the same purpose. The main difference is that a SLurl is simply a text link, while a landmark is an inventory item type which can only be used inside of SL. How to use and make SLurls To use an existing SLurl: Click this example SLurl. On the page it takes you to, click Visit this location to open it in Second Life. To make a new SLurl: Move your avatar to where you want to create the SLurl. Click the place name in the location bar (near the top of the Viewer window) to convert it to a SLurl. It'll look like http://maps.secondlife.com/secondlife/Here/128/128/44. Right-click and Copy the SLurl while it's selected, or use Ctrl+V. Paste the SLurl where you want it. Alternatively, you can also use the World Map to get SLurls: Select World menu > World Map. Click Copy SLurl. You can also enter another place on the map, then click Copy SLurl to get a remote SLurl. Converting a landmark to a SLurl (and vice-versa) To convert a landmark to a SLurl: Select Me > Places. Right-click a landmark and select Copy SLurl. Paste the Slurl where you want it. To convert a SLurl to a landmark: Click or otherwise use the SLurl to get to its location. Select World > Landmark This Place. The landmark is saved to your inventory. Setting your home and login locations Home location There are three types of land you can set as your home location: Land you own Land set to group access for a group to which you belong, if you have the necessary ability. For more information on group land, see Group-owned land. For more information on group roles and abilities, see Creating, managing, moderating, and disbanding groups. Infohubs, To set your home: Move your avatar to the chosen location. Use World > Set Home To Here. A message appears confirming if your home is set successfully. You can always teleport straight to your home location by using World > Teleport home. Login location By default, you will always login at your last location inworld. You can also set your login location to be your home and whether to display the option in the login screen. See Change your login location.
  50. 0 points
    Usernames The format of your username depends on when you registered the account Logging in with your username Using a Viewer with separate first and last Name login fields Using a Viewer with a single name login field Showing or hiding others' usernames Display names Allowed characters Setting or changing your display name Showing or hiding others' display names Information for content creators and merchants Both username and display name are visible on objects Username is shown in transaction history Search covers both usernames and display names If customers know your username, don't set your display name to avoid confusion LSL uses only "full name" derived from username In other languages: Deutsch Español Français Italiano 日本語 Português Pусский Türkçe In Second Life, you have: A username, your unique Second Life account name that you choose when you register your account. Once chosen, you cannot change your username. A display name shown to others inworld and on your profile. You can change your display name as often as once a week. In addition, you can always reset it to its default, your username. Your username and your display name are totally separate. If you haven't set a display name, then it defaults to your username. Usernames Your username is the unique account name or account ID you use to log into Second Life. By default, it appears above your avatar inworld and identifies you to other Second Life Residents. You can also set a display name that appears above your username. The format of your username depends on when you registered the account In 2010, Second Life changed from registering new accounts with a "first name" and "last name" to a single-word username If you registered your account after mid-2010, you created a unique, single-word username; for example: mortimer1980, or jsmith57. When you log in to Second Life, you simply enter the username you selected when you registered. If you created your Second Life account before mid-2010, you have a Second Life "first name" and "last name" that determine your username as follows: firstname.lastname. For example, if your Second Life name was originally Joe Smith when you joined, your username is joe.smith. Your username is a unique and personal account identifier in Second Life, and as such, once you choose it you cannot change it. However, you can change your display name as often as once a week. Your display name appears above your username by default and is a flexible way to identify yourself to other Second Life Residents. Logging in with your username The official Second Life Viewer requires a single username. However, some third-party viewers still have fields for a first name and a last name. Using a Viewer with separate first and last Name login fields If you are a newer Second Life Resident with a single-word username: Enter your username in the First Name field. Enter resident in the Last Name field. For example, if your username is thejoesmith, enter: First name thejoesmith Last name resident If you are a longtime Second Life Resident with both a first and last name, simply enter your first name and last name in the corresponding fields. For example, if your Second Life name is Joe Smith, enter: First name Joe Last name Smith Using a Viewer with a single name login field If you are a Second Life Resident with a single-word username, simply enter that username along with your password and log in as usual. If you are an older Second Life Resident who has a first and last name, you have two options: Enter your original first and last name (in lowercase, separated by a period) into the field provided OR Enter your original first and last name separated by a space (case does not matter). For example, if your SL name is David Dearheart: Username: david.dearheart OR david dearheart OR David Dearheart Then enter your password into the Password field and log in. Showing or hiding others' usernames You can't control the display of your username to other Residents, but you can control whether you see others' usernames and whether you see your own name. To show or hide usernames inworld, both above other avatars and in chat: Log into Second Life. Choose Me > Preferences from the top menu. Click the General tab. Select the Usernames checkbox. If the box is checked, usernames are shown. If the box is not checked, usernames are hidden. Click OK. A club scene showing usernames and display names is illustrated at left. In this image, some usernames are blurred. Notice that only the username is shown above avatars who haven't set a display name. Display names Your display name is: A name you choose shown to other avatars in the Second Life virtual world. A string of charactersup to 31 characters long that contains at least one alphanumeric character. It can include most Unicode script characters, spaces, and some punctuation. Distinct from the username you use to log in. Not necessarily unique; other avatars may have the same display name as you. You can choose whether or not to show other Residents' display names and usernames inworld. If you choose to view display names or usernames, they appear in the name tags above every avatar and in chat. Allowed characters In addition to letters and numbers, you can use the following characters in your display name: ' (apostrophe) - (hyphen-minus) . (full stop) : (colon) · (middle dot) ֊ ֊ (Armenian hyphen) (Hebrew geresh) ״ (Hebrew gershayim) ་ (Tibetan tsheg) - (hyphen) ’ (right single quotation mark) ‧ (hyphenation point) = (katakana-hiragana double hyphen) · (katakana middle dot) Setting or changing your display name You can change your display name once every seven days, but you can Reset it at any time, which makes it appear as your "classic" Second Life first name and last name, or your username. To set or change your display name: Log into Second Life. In the Second Life Viewer, click Me > Profile... or in the toolbar. Click Edit Profile. Click Display Name. Type the desired display name in the field under New Display Name. Type the name again to confirm. Click Save. Note: Changes to your display name may take up to 24 hours to propagate throughout all of Second Life's systems. Showing or hiding others' display names To show or hide display names inworld, both in chat and over all avatars: Log into Second Life. Choose Me > Preferences from the top menu. Click the General tab. Select the View Display Names checkbox. If the box is checked, display names are shown. If the box is unchecked, display names are hidden. Click OK. Information for content creators and merchants Both username and display name are visible on objects Object properties and build tools show both the username and the display name of an object's owner and creator. During Linden dollar and other transactions, both your username and display name are visible. Display names on objects change when you change your display name, although it may take up to one day for the change to appear everywhere. Username is shown in transaction history Your transaction history shows only usernames for both buyers and sellers. Search covers both usernames and display names When you search for a Resident, search results contain both display names and usernames so that you can easily determine which John Smith you're really looking for. If customers know your username, don't set your display name to avoid confusion To emphasize your username, don't set your display name; this way your display name and username match. As a precaution, you may also advise your customers that they should only pay avatars/objects matching your username. LSL uses only "full name" derived from username LSL functions return the "full name". For example: Username: kelly.linden Full name: Kelly Linden Display Name: Teh Kellz For more information, see LSL Avatar/Name in the Second Life Wiki.
×
×
  • Create New...